2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2010. 1. 16. · 2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M....

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1Head Restraints ......................................... 1-2Front Seats ............................................... 1-3Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12Child Restraints ....................................... 1-33Airbag System ......................................... 1-55Restraint System Check ............................ 1-70

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10Windows ................................................. 2-15Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-20Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-24Mirrors .................................................... 2-38Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-42OnStar® System ...................................... 2-51Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-55Storage Areas ......................................... 2-62Sunroof .................................................. 2-64

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-40Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-50

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-67Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-95

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-26

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-43Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-46Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-46Tires ...................................................... 5-48Appearance Care ..................................... 5-86Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-94Electrical System ...................................... 5-94Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-103

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-17

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name DTS areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. GM reserves the right to make changesafter that time without notice. For vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Divisionwherever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may or may not beon your specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning to end to learn aboutthe vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:


1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

IndexTo quickly locate information about the vehicle, use theindex in the back of the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25793159 B Second Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsA circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”or “Do not let this happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were to ignorethe warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoidor reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

Many times, this damage would not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that use symbolsinstead of text. Symbols are shown along with the textdescribing the operation or information relating to aspecific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see yourowner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see aservice manual for additional instructions or information.

iii

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbols that may be found onthe vehicle and what they mean. For more informationon the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv

Head Restraints ...............................................1-2Front Seats ......................................................1-3

Power Seats ..................................................1-3Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4Massaging Lumbar .........................................1-4Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-5Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .........1-6Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-8Center Seat .................................................1-10

Rear Seats .....................................................1-10Heated Seats ...............................................1-10Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ........................1-11Power Lumbar ..............................................1-11

Safety Belts ...................................................1-12Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-26Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31Lap Belt ......................................................1-31Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32

Child Restraints .............................................1-33Older Children ..............................................1-33Infants and Young Children ............................1-36

Child Restraint Systems .................................1-39Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) ......................................1-43Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ....................................1-49Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-51Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ............................1-52Airbag System ...............................................1-55

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-57When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-60What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-61How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-62What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-62Passenger Sensing System ............................1-64Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-68Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-69Restraint System Check ..................................1-70

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-70Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-71

Section 1 Seats and Restraint System

1-1

Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraintsin the outboard seating positions.

{CAUTION:

With head restraints that are not installed andadjusted properly, there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in acrash. Do not drive until the head restraints for alloccupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraintis at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.This position reduces the chance of a neck injury ina crash.

1-2

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower thehead restraint, press the button, located on the topof the seatback, and push the restraint down.Push down on the head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it is locked in place.The head restraints are not designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seatcontrols are locatedon the outboard sideof the seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushionby moving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushionby moving the rear of the control up or down.

The front seats also have power reclining seatbacks.See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8.On vehicles with the memory feature, memory settingscan be programmed and recalled for seat positions. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-6.

1-3

Power Lumbar

The power lumbarcontrols are locatedon the outboard sideof the front seats.

Press the lumbar control forward to increase supportand rearward to decrease support. Press the topor bottom of the control to raise or lower the supportmechanism.

Keep in mind that as a seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the positionof the lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Massaging Lumbar

On vehicles with thisfeature, the switch islocated on the outboardside of the front seatsbehind the lumbar switch.

Press the switch to turn the massaging lumbar featureon. The ignition must be on for this feature to work.The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.To stop massage, press the massaging lumbarswitch again or press the power lumbar switch.

1-4

Heated and Cooled SeatsThe vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats.To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignitionmust be on.

The buttons are locatedon the front doors.

H (Cooled Seat): Press to turn on the cooled seat.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on theheated seat and seatback.A light on the button shows the feature is on.

Each feature has three temperature settings indicated bythree lights next to the buttons. The highest setting showsthree lights, two is medium and one is the lowest.

When you press a button, the feature will turn on at thehighest setting. Each time the button is pressed, thefeature will go down one temperature setting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button untilthe display lights turn off.

If the vehicle has remote vehicle start and it is startedusing the RKE transmitter, the front heated seats willbe turned on to the high setting if it is cold outside.See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5. When the keyis inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned on,this feature will turn off. To turn it back on, press thedesired button.

Drive Side Buttonsshown, Passenger Side

Buttons similar

1-5

Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel

On vehicles with the memory package, the controls arelocated on the driver door panel. The controls areused to program and recall memory settings for thedriver seat, outside mirror, and steering wheel positionif the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopicsteering feature.

To save positions in memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, andthe steering wheel to a comfortable position.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps soundthrough the driver side front speaker to let youknow that the position has been stored.

A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel positioncan be programmed by repeating the previous steps andpressing button 2 for a second driver.

1-6

To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be inP (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move to theposition previously stored for the identified driver.You will hear a single beep.

If you use the RKE transmitter to enter the vehicle andthe remote recall memory feature is on, automaticseat and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORYSEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customizationon page 3-86 for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature at anytime, press one of the power seat controls, memorybuttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirrorbuttons.

If something has blocked the driver seat and/or thesteering column while recalling a memory position,the driver seat and/or the steering column recall maystop. If this happens remove the obstruction, then pressthe appropriate control for the area that is not recallingfor two seconds. Try recalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memory button. If thememory position is still not recalling, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-7

Easy Exit RecallThe control for this feature is located on the driver doorpanel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit position can berecalled by pressing the exit button. You will heara single beep. The driver seat will move back, and if thevehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steeringfeature, the power telescopic steering column willmove up and forward.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automaticseat and power telescopic steering column movementwill occur when the key is removed from the ignition.See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-86 for more information.

Further programming for automatic seat and steeringwheel movement can be done using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). You can select or notselect the following:

• The easy exit recall feature

• The memory seat recall feature

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-86.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

The seats have powerreclining seatbacks. Usethe vertical power seatcontrol located on theoutboard side of the seat.

• Press the control toward the rear of the vehicle torecline the seatback.

• Press the control toward the front of the vehicle toraise the seatback.

1-8

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is inmotion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,the safety belts cannot do their job when reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it willnot be against your body. Instead, it will be in frontof you. In a crash, you could go into it, receivingneck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,the belt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle ismoving.

1-9

Center Seat

The vehicle may have a front center seat. This seatcan be converted to a storage area by loweringthe seatback. See Center Flex Storage Unit onpage 2-63.

Rear Seats

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated rear seats.

To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must be on.

The buttons are located onthe rear doors.

I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heatedseatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on theheated seat and seatback.

1-10

Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A lighton that button will display to show which feature is on.

Each feature has three temperature settings indicatedby three lights next to the buttons. The highest settingshows three lights, two is medium and one is the lowest.

When you press a button, the feature will turn on atthe highest setting. Each time you press the button,the feature will go down one temperature setting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the buttonuntil the display lights turn off.

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorYour vehicle has a pass-through door that providesaccess to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 2-13.

Power LumbarYour vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbarsupport, without the massage feature, for the outboardrear seat positions.

The rear lumbar supportcontrols are located on therear doors in front of theheated seat buttons.

To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the front ofthe control to increase support or rearward to decreasesupport. The lumbar control can also be moved upand down to adjust the location of the support.

1-11

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis section of the manual describes how to use safetybelts properly. It also describes some things not to dowith safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannotbe worn properly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, theinjuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or be ejected from thevehicle. You and your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle thesafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-53for additional information.

1-12

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In manyof them, people who buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Without safety belts, theycould have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

1-13

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

1-14

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-15

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers About SafetyBelts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

1-16

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driverdoes not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-33or Infants and Young Children on page 1-36. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know.

1-17

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floorin front of you. The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likely to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force onyour abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forward toomuch, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly against your body.

1-19


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

1-20


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-21


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes overan armrest like this. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. Thebelt force would then be applied on the abdomen,not on the pelvic bones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goesunder the armrests.

1-22


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internal organs like yourliver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-23


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your bodycould move too far forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-24


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In acrash, you would not have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, makeit straight so it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

1-25

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulderexcept for the center front passenger position(if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belton page 1-31 for more information.

The following instructions explain how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out allthe way, the child restraint locking feature maybe engaged. If this happens, let the belt go backall the way and start again.Engaging the child restraint locking feature in theright front seating position may affect the passengersensing system. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-64 for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,check if the correct buckle is being used.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-32.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

1-26

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,move it to the height that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in thissection for instructions on use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should return to its stowed position.

Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing whenthe safety belt is not in use. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guideloop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is outof the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

1-27

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for thedriver and right front passenger position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.Improper shoulder belt height adjustment couldreduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

Press the releasebutton (A) and movethe height adjuster tothe desired position. Theadjuster can be movedup by pushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try tomove it down without pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for frontoutboard occupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safetybelt assembly. They can help tighten the safety beltsduring the early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehiclehas side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners canhelp tighten the safety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensionersactivate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for the vehicle’s safetybelt system. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 1-71.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

1-28

There is one guide for each outboard passenger positionin the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide tothe safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on theside of the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

1-29

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may notprovide the protection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be seriously injured.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt asdescribed previously in this section. Make surethat the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze thebelt edges together so that the safety belt can beremoved from the guide. Slide the guide into its storagepocket on the top of the seatback.

1-30

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear alap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.

You vehicle may have a center seating position.When you sit in the center front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull italong the belt.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt.

1-31

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 1-32.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into thebuckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be surethat the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender willbe long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, donot let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat itis made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach itto the regular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

1-32

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat, state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulderbelt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, tryusing the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-ShoulderBelt on page 1-26 for more information. If theshoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length oftrip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a positionwith a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide.

1-33

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It shouldnever be worn over the abdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.

According to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safetybelt. The safety belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only one person at a time.

1-34

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with theshoulder belt behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. The child couldmove too far forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-35

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and in everyCanadian province says children up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them. Every timeinfants and young children ride in vehicles, theyshould have the protection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strikeother people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Never hold an infant or a child while riding in avehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child willbecome so heavy it is not possible to hold it duringa crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenlybecome a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.An infant should be secured in an appropriaterestraint.

1-36

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child

CAUTION: (Continued)


restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

1-37

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which itwill be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasinga child restraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during acrash, infants need complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is not fully developed andits head weighs so much compared with the rest ofits body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across the strongest partof an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsshould always be secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

1-38

{CAUTION:

A young child’s hip bones are still so small thatthe vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remainlow on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. To reducethe risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,young children should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and,in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

1-39

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-40

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in thevehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions that came withthat child restraint and the instructions in thismanual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may be onthe restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properly following theinstructions that came with that child restraint.

1-41

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in a child restraint systemor infant restraint system secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children and child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including: an infant or achild riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child ridingin a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 foradditional information.

1-42

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center front seatcan be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbagsif they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is always better to secure achild restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to securethe child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when nochild is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint during drivingor in a crash. This system is designed to make installationof a child restraint easier. The LATCH system usesanchors in the vehicle and attachments on the childrestraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint isproperly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual. When installing a childrestraint with a top tether, you must also use either thelower anchors or the safety belts to properly securethe child restraint. A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.The child restraint manufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use the child restraint and itsattachments. The following explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints havelower anchors and attachments or top tether anchorsand attachments.

1-43

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraintto the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the childrestraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehiclein order to reduce the forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

1-44

Some child restraints that have top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, onecan be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions with toptether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two loweranchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position with loweranchors has two labels,near the crease betweenthe seatback and theseat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors, thetop tether anchor symbolis located on the cover.

Rear Seat

1-45

The top tether anchors are located under the covers onthe rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the cover toaccess the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached toanchors, the child restraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, the child could beseriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with the childrestraint and the instructions in this manual.

1-46

{CAUTION:

Do not attach more than one child restraint to asingle anchor. Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor could cause the anchoror attachment to come loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others could be injured. Toreduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle anyunused safety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rubagainst the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damagethese parts. If necessary, move buckled safetybelts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety beltbuckled. This could damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to itsstowed position, before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to thelower anchors. If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on

the child restraint to the lower anchors.

1-47

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.Refer to the child restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to

expose the anchor.2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head

restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint andyou are using a singletether, route the tetherover the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable headrest orhead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe headrest or headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether under the headrestor head restraint andin between the headrestor head restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

1-48

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionWhen securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,study the instructions that came with the child restraint tomake sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in thevehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraint needs to be installedin the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put theRestraint on page 1-42.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-49

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so that thesafety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-50

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. When installing aforward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding theuse of the top tether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 formore information.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safetybelt and let it return to the stowed position. If the toptether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center front seatcan be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbagsif they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is always better to secure achild restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition.

1-51

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionThis vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place tosecure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-42.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing systemwhich is designed to turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-64 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-55 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 foradditional information.

1-52

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using asafety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the topstrap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicatoron the passenger airbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-55.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

1-53

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installing a forward-facingchild restraint, it may be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

1-54

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under Passenger Sensing System onpage 1-64 for more information.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehiclesafety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right frontpassenger.

The vehicle may also have the following airbags:

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger andthe passenger seated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the wordAIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closestto the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appearalong the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

1-55

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou are not wearing your safety belt — even if youhave airbags. Airbags are designed to work withsafety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbagsare not designed to deploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your only restraint. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things inside thevehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against thedoor or side windows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-railairbags.

1-56

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system is designedfor them. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children on page 1-33 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-36.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

1-57

The right front passenger frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and

right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacksclosest to the door.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-58

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, rightfront passenger, and second row outboard passengers,they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat accessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mounted side impactairbag.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle withroof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. If you do,the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-59

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reducethe potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’sor right front passenger’s head and chest. However, theyare only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict how severe a crash islikely to be in time for the airbags to inflate andhelp restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enablesthe sensing system to monitor the position of theright front passenger’s seat. The passenger seat positionsensor and passenger safety belt buckle switchprovide information that is used to determine if theairbags should deploy at a reduced level or at fulldeployment.

In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

1-60

Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbagthat adjusts the restraint according to crash severity,seat location, and safety belt status using electronicfrontal sensor(s) and other special sensors which enablethe sensing system to monitor the position of the frontpassenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to areduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forwardposition. For more rearward front seating positions,the passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth(a full deployment), based on safety belt status andthe crash severity measured early in the event. (Alwayswear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)

Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See AirbagSystem on page 1-55. Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags arenot intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mountedside impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bywhat the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location and severity of the sideimpact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing thebag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside thesteering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicleswith seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbagmodules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the sidewindows that have occupant seating positions.

1-61

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags. See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 1-60 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-61.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of the windshield or beingable to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

1-62

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave breathing problems but cannot get out of thevehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following an airbag deployment,you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlockthe doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn thehazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts for theairbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy onpage 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

1-63

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensing system for theright front passenger position. The passenger airbagstatus indicator will be visible on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,are visible during the system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the word ONor OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-55.

The passenger sensing system turns off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag under certain conditions. The driverairbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger seat. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics, children are safer whenproperly secured in a rear seat in the correct childrestraint for their weight and size.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facingchild restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

United States Canada

1-64

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant is present ina rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off ofthe seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags are off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 3-55.

1-65

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size is sitting properly inthe right front passenger seat.When the passenger sensing system has allowed theairbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and staylit to remind you that the airbags are active.For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54for more information, including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraintIf a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit:1. Turn the vehicle off.2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as

blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directionsprovided by the child restraint manufacturer andrefer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position on page 1-52.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicleoff. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make surethat the vehicle seatback is not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer/retailer.

1-66

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and enable the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional material from the seat, suchas blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered onthe seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for two to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

1-67

Additional Factors Affecting SystemOperationSafety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing system maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inthe Index for additional information about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates. We recommendthat you not use seat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-69 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat orbetween the passenger seat cushion and seatbackmay interfere with the proper operation of thepassenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and theservice manual have information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 7-16.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned offand the battery is disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

1-68

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headlineror pillar garnish trim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger’s position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the passenger’sseat. The passenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,

installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either prevent proper deploymentof the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-64.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-69

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Tornor frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-53 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-89.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-54 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbag coverings. If there areany opened or broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.For the location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-70

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in yourvehicle. A damaged restraint system may notproperly protect the person using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need newsafety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies that were used during anycrash may have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was beingused during a crash, you may need new LATCH systemparts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thesafety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), wasnot being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if thevehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle is started, or while you aredriving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54.

1-71

✍ NOTES

1-72

Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-5Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7

Doors and Locks ............................................2-10Door Locks ..................................................2-10Central Door Unlocking System ......................2-11Power Door Locks ........................................2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Trunk ..........................................................2-13

Windows ........................................................2-15Power Windows ............................................2-16Sun Visors ...................................................2-19

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-20Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-20Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-21PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-22PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation .................................................2-23

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-24New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-24Ignition Positions ..........................................2-25Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-26Starting the Engine .......................................2-26Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-28Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-29Performance Shifting .....................................2-32Parking Brake ..............................................2-32Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-33Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-34Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37

Mirrors ...........................................................2-38Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-38Compass .....................................................2-38Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-40Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-40Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-41Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-41Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-41

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Object Detection Systems ...............................2-42Ultrasonic Front and Rear

Parking Assist (UFRPA) .............................2-42Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) .........................2-45Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......................2-49

OnStar® System .............................................2-51Universal Home Remote System ......................2-55

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ..............2-55

Storage Areas ................................................2-62Glove Box ...................................................2-62Cupholders ..................................................2-62Front Storage Area .......................................2-62Center Console Storage .................................2-62Center Flex Storage Unit ...............................2-63Floor Mats ...................................................2-63Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-63Convenience Net ..........................................2-63

Sunroof .........................................................2-64

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The master key is used for the driver door, ignition, andglove box.

The valet key is used for the driver door and ignition.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Service on page 7-7.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy orsnowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician forservice.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functionswork up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-4.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additionalinformation.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabledthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parkinglamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred.The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again withinfive seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-86 for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-21.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stayon for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twiceto indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-86. Pressing K may disarmthe content theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-21.

With Remote Start(Without Remote

Start Similar)

2-5

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold forabout one second to unlock the trunk. The transmissionmust be in P (Park).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and releaseto locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash andthe horn sounds three times.

Press and hold L for more than two seconds toactivate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved toON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition mustbe in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes with two transmitters.Each transmitter will have a number on top of it,“1” or “2”. These numbers correspond to the driverof the vehicle. For example, the memory seat positionfor driver 1 will be recalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1”, if enabled through the DIC. See MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-6 andDIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86 for moreinformation.

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle willwork. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased and programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once the new transmitteris programmed. Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it. See RELEARNREMOTE KEY under DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-68.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC.See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touchany of the circuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage the transmitter.

2-6

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin objectinserted into the notch, located above themetal base.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe remote vehicle starting feature allows you to startthe engine from outside of the vehicle. It also startsup the vehicle’s automatic climate control system.When the remote start system is active, the climatecontrol system will heat and cool the inside of thevehicle according to the previous settings of thesystem before turning the vehicle off. The rear windowdefogger will be turned on by the climate controlsystem when it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heatedseats, they will also turn on when it is cold outside.See Heated and Cooled Seats on page 1-5 for additionalinformation. Cooled seats are not activated during aremote start. Normal operation of the climate controlsystem will return after the key is turned to ON/RUN.See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-40.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws may requirea person using remote start to have the vehicle inview when doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle islow on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

2-7

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKEtransmitter functions will have an increased rangeof operation. However, the range may be less while thevehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button will be on theRKE transmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,then immediately press and hold the transmitter’sremote start button until the turn signal lightsflash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible,press and hold the remote start button for at leastfour seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressingthe remote start button again after the vehiclehas started will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turnon and remain on while the vehicle is running.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle hasbeen driven, repeat these steps, while the engineis still running, to extend the engine running timeby 10 minutes. Remote start can be extendedone time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insertand turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut offafter 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.

To manually shut off a remote start:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and pressthe remote start button until the parking lampsturn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature provides two separatestarts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or itprovides one start with 10 minutes of engine running thatmay be extended 10 more minutes. If you press andrelease the transmitter lock button and then press andhold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter

2-8

again before the first 10 minutes of engine running timehas expired, 10 minutes are added to the remainingminutes. For example, if the lock button and thenthe remote start buttons are pressed again afterfive minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes areadded and you now have 15 minutes of engine running.The added ten minutes are considered a secondremote vehicle start.

Once two remote starts or a single start with a timeextension have been used, the vehicle must be startedwith the ignition key before you can use the remotestart feature again.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there isan emission control system malfunction.

The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start ifthe coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressureis too low.

Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be disabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DICVehicle Customization on page 3-86 for additionalinformation.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36 for important safetyinformation when using remote start in a closedgarage.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle startfeature, it may have the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. See yourdealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer’sremote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.

2-9

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

• Passengers, especially children, can easilyopen the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chance of being thrownout of the vehicle in a crash is increased ifthe doors are not locked. So, all passengersshould wear safety belts properly and thedoors should be locked whenever the vehicleis driven.

• Young children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay be unable to get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Always lock the vehicle wheneverleaving it.



• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking your doors can helpprevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,you must unlock the doors with the key orRKE transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.

From the outside, use either the key or theRKE transmitter.

From the inside, use the power door lock switches ormanual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are locatedat the top of the door panel near the window.

Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.

2-10

Central Door Unlocking SystemThe vehicle has a central door unlocking mode.When unlocking the driver door, the other doorscan be unlocked at the same time by turning thekey clockwise in the door lock cylinder twice.

Power Door LocksOn vehicles with power door locks, the switches arelocated on the front doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and pressto lock the doors.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksThe vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors areclosed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is movedout of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The doors willunlock every time the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is moved into P (Park).

If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not inP (Park), have the person use the manual lock knobor power door lock switch. When the door is closedagain, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lockknob or power door lock switch to lock the door.

The door locks can be programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).These prompts allow the driver to choose various lockand unlock settings. For programming information,see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86.

2-11

Rear Door Security LocksThe vehicle has security locks that prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors from the inside.

The rear door security locks are located on the insideedge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors toaccess them.

To assist you in finding the lock, the vehicle will haveone of the following:

To use these locks:

1. Turn the knob to the vertical position to engagethe lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear doors on the vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside when this feature is in use.

When you want to open a rear door with the securitylock on:

1. Unlock the door using the RKE transmitter, the frontdoor power lock switch, or by lifting the rear doormanual lock knob.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Turn the knob to the horizontal position todisengage the lock.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionIf the key is in the ignition and the power door lock switchis used to lock the doors, all doors will lock and then thedriver door will unlock. It is always recommended thatthe ignition key is removed from the vehicle when lockingthe doors.

The lockout protection feature can be overridden byholding the power door lock switch for three secondsor longer.

2-12

Trunk

{CAUTION:

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is drivenwith the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, ortrunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or under the

instrument panel.• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide,see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.

Remote Trunk Release

G (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunkrelease button is located to the left of the steeringwheel next to the instrument panel brightness control.Press the button to open the trunk. The vehicle must bein P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet lockout switchmust be off to use this button.

You can also press the button with the trunk symbol onthe RKE transmitter to open the trunk. To disablethis feature, see Valet Lockout Switch on page 2-20.

The trunk can be accessed using the Rear SeatPass-Through. See “Rear Seat Pass-Through” followingthis section.

2-13

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located inside the trunk near the latch. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light. Pull therelease handle to open the trunk from the inside.

Rear Seat Pass-ThroughThe vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This doorallows access to the trunk from inside the vehicle.

The rear seat armrest must be down for thepass-through door to open. To release the pass-throughdoor, move the release up. To close the door, raise itand push it until it latches.

2-14

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

2-15

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys isdangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closing window.Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seat use thewindow lockout button to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power windowswitches are located onthe driver door.

In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.The front power window switch operates withtwo positions for both up and down movement and therear power window switch operates with one positionfor up and two positions for down movement. Press theswitch to the first position to lower the window to thedesired level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows oncethe ignition has been turned off. For more information,see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-26.

2-16

Express-Down/Up WindowsWindows with the express feature allow the windows tobe raised and lowered all the way without holdingthe switch.

Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activatethe express feature.

The express mode can be canceled at any time bybriefly pressing or pulling the switch.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.Weather conditions such as severe icing may also causethe window to auto-reverse. The window will return tonormal operation once the obstruction or condition isremoved.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, the window will notreverse automatically. You or others could beinjured and the window could be damaged.Before you use express override, make surethat all people and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the second position. The windowwill rise for as long as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the express mode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on an object inits path. Use care when using the override mode.

2-17

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will need toreprogram each front power window for the express-upfeature to work. Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle’s battery.

To program each front window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch until thewindow is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up until the window isfully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch up for approximatelytwo seconds after the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the processfor the other windows.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout buttonis located on the driver door near the window switches.

Press the right side of the button to disable the rearwindow controls. The light on the button will illuminate,indicating the feature is in use. The rear windowsstill can be raised or lowered using the driver windowswitches when the lockout feature is active.

To restore power to the rear windows, press the buttonagain. The light on the button will go out.

2-18

Sun VisorsSwing down the primary visor to block out glare. It canalso be detached from the center mount and movedto the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains toblock the glare from the front. The visors also haveside-to-side slide capability.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorPull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.The light will come on when the cover is opened.It will go out when you close the cover. If your vehiclehas the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up ordown to brighten or dim the light.

Rear Power SunshadeIf your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps toreduce the amount of heat and light entering therear window.

The switch is located onthe overhead console.

The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf.It only works while the ignition is on or while the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-26.

To raise the power sunshade, press and release theswitch. To close the power sunshade, press and releasethe switch again.

Never store objects on the rear shelf because theymay get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about inyour vehicle.

2-19

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,they do not make it impossible to steal.

Valet Lockout SwitchThe valet lockout switchis located inside theglove box.

9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn thelockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off,you can open the trunk using either the keyless entrytransmitter or the trunk release button located nearthe headlamp switch on the instrument panel.

— (On): Press this side of the button to turn the lockoutfeature on. When the lockout feature is turned on,the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless entrytransmitter or the trunk release button located near theheadlamp switch on the instrument panel.

If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable theUniversal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.

Locking the glove box with your key will also help tosecure your vehicle.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 2-5 and Trunk on page 2-13 for additionalinformation.

2-20

Content Theft-DeterrentThe security light islocated on the instrumentpanel cluster.

To arm the system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch withthe door open or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. The security light will flash.

3. Close all the doors. The security light will come onand stay on for approximately 30 seconds.

If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or aRKE transmitter the horn will sound and the lamps willflash for about 30 seconds.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock thedoors with a key or use the manual door lock. It armsonly if you use a power door lock with the door open orthe RKE transmitter.

To avoid arming the alarm by accident:

• Lock the vehicle with the door key or the manualdoor lock.

• Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKEtransmitter system. Pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter, or unlocking a door with thekey disarms the content theft-deterrent system.Unlocking a door any other way will activatethe alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’sdoor with your key. You can also turn off the alarmby using the unlock button on the RKE transmittersystem, or by starting the car with a valid key.

Changes or modifications made to this system byother than an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use the theft system.

2-21

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then

get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,lock the vehicle using the power door lock or theRKE system and close the door. Wait 30 secondsuntil the security lamp goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manuallock and open the door. The horn will sound andthe hazard lights will flash.

You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s doorwith your key, using the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-95. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,you may need to have your vehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.


1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.





PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder inthe key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

2-22

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the keyis removed from the ignition.

The system is automatically disarmed when the key isturned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or STARTfrom the LOCK/OFF position.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someoneis using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle fromstarting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to startthe vehicle will be discouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security light comeson when trying to start the vehicle, there may be aproblem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears tobe undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-95. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicle needsservice. If your vehicle does start, the first key may befaulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In anemergency, contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”the transponder value of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is for programming additionalkeys only. If all the currently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

2-23

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in theignition and start the engine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer/retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it tothe ON/RUN position within five seconds of turningthe original key to LOCK/OFF.The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are tobe programmed.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast orslow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-28 for the trailer towingcapabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

2-24

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch has four different positions:

In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn inthe ignition could cause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is allthe way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. This positionlocks the ignition and transmission and steering column.

The steering can bind with the wheels turned offcenter. If this happens, move the steering wheel fromright to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radioand windshield wipers operate while the engine is off.To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns toafter the vehicle is started. This position displays someof the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will display DRIVER DOOR OPENwhen the driver door is opened if the ignition is inLOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in theignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73for more information.

2-25

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to these accessories will work up to 10 minutesor until the driver’s door is opened. For an additional10 minutes of power, close all the doors and turn the keyto ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).The engine will not start in any other position.To restart the engine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicleis moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicleis stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slow down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transmissiongently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

2-26

The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. If the ignitionkey is turned to the START position, and thenreleased when the engine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engineis already running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by returning the key to the START positionimmediately after cranking has ended, can overheatand damage the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,to let the cranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there as you hold thekey in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently until the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with theelectronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

2-27

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater can provide easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater should be pluggedin at least four hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The electrical cord is located on the driver sideof the engine, behind the transmission dipstick/fluidfill location and next to the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord could overheat and causea fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug thecord into a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts and prevent damage.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged independs on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer inthe area where you will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.

2-28

Automatic Transmission OperationThe automatic transmission may have a shift leverlocated either on the steering column or on the consolebetween the seats.

There are several different positions for the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It isthe best position to use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) beforestarting the engine. The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system. You have to fullyapply the regular brakes before you can shift fromP (Park) while the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If youcannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shiftlever. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)as you maintain brake application. Then move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 2-34.

2-29

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

Also use this gear to rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand without damaging thetransmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,Ice, or Snow on page 4-18 for additional information.

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldmove very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drive gearwhile the engine is running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) withthe engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine isnot running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It providesthe best fuel economy for the vehicle. If you needmore power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

The transmission will shift down to the next gear andhave more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditionscould result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss ofControl on page 4-10.

2-30

Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it ismoving slowly or not shifting gears as you increasespeed may damage the transmission. Have thevehicle serviced right away. You can drive in2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.

D (Drive) can be used for towing. You may want toshift the transmission to 3 (Third) or, if necessary, to alower gear if the transmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

See Towing a Trailer on page 4-28 for more information.

3 (Third): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and when going down asteep hill.

2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed morethan 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speedas you go down steep mountain roads, but thenyou would also want to use the brakes off and on.

Notice: Do not shift into 2 (Second) unless you aregoing slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you candamage the engine and/or transmission.

1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed evenmore than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle ismoving forward, the transmission will not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehiclein one place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-31

Performance ShiftingIf the vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change indriving patterns. If you make an aggressive drivingmaneuver, the vehicle’s transmission automaticallyshifts to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicleperformance. The vehicle will automatically returnto normal operation when you return to normal drivingpatterns.

Parking BrakeThe parking brake pedal islocated to the left of theregular brake pedal,near the driver door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedaldown, then push the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light onthe instrument panel cluster should come on. If itdoes not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set, theignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph(8 km/h). The brake light will come on and stay on untilthe parking brake is released. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-56 for more information.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down.When you lift your foot off the parking brake pedal,the pedal will follow your foot to the released position.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.

2-32

Shifting Into Park

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-28.

Steering Column Shift LeverIf the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use thisprocedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the shiftlever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.

3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,set the parking brake. See Parking Brake onpage 2-32 for more information.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Console Shift LeverIf the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,use this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing thelever all the way toward the front of the vehicleand then to the left.

3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set theparking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32for more information.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

2-33

Leaving the Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with theengine running. The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could overheatand even catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking Brakeon page 2-32 for more information.

Torque LockTorque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts toomuch force on the parking pawl in the transmission.This happens when parking on a hill and shiftingthe transmission into P (Park) is not done properly andthen it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shift intoP (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park” in thissection.

If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to bepushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parkingpawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of Park

Automatic Transmission Shift LockThis vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift leveris in P (Park)

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out ofP (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedalis applied.

2-34

The shift lock is always functional except in the caseof a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)battery.

If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.See Jump Starting on page 5-38.

Console ShiftIf the console shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)

1. Apply the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. See Ignition Positions on page 2-25 formore information.

3. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).

4. Then, shift into the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice.

Column ShiftIf the column shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)

1. Apply the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position. See IgnitionPositions on page 2-25 for more information.

3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to theN (Neutral) position.

4. Move the column shift to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things thatcan burn.

2-35

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure toCO can cause unconsciousness and even death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells or sounds strange ordifferent.

• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosionor damage.



• The vehicle’s exhaust system has beenmodified, damaged or improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openings in the vehiclebody from damage or after-marketmodifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspectedthat exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running inan enclosed area such as a garage or a buildingthat has no fresh air ventilation.

2-36

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area that hasno fresh air ventilation. For more information,see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theautomatic transmission shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehiclewhen the engine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure the vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set theparking brake after you move the shift leverto P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33.

If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-28.

2-37

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearviewmirror with a compass display. The mirror may alsohave OnStar® controls and Intellibeam™. For moreinformation on Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp Control System” under ExteriorLamps on page 3-29. For more information aboutOnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 2-51.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationAutomatic dimming reduces the glare of lights frombehind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on andthe indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle isstarted.

O (On/Off): Press and hold O for about three secondsto turn the dimming feature and compass display onor off.

AUTO 3 (Vehicles with Intellibeam™): Press andhold for approximately three seconds to turn thecompass display on or off.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.Use a soft towel dampened with water.

Compass

Compass Operation

Press O or AUTO 3 , depending on the vehicle,to turn the compass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, aftera few seconds, the mirror will display the compassheading. The compass automatically calibrates as thevehicle is driven.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds, the display does not show thecorrect direction, (for example, N for North), theremay be a strong magnetic field interfering with thecompass. Interference can be caused by a magneticantenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or asimilar magnetic item.

2-38

The compass can be placed in calibration modemanually by pressing and holding O or AUTO 3 ,depending on the vehicle, until a C is shown inthe compass display.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the displayreads a direction.

Compass VarianceThe compass is set to zone eight. If you do notlive in zone eight or drive out of the area, thecompass variance needs to be changed to theappropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find the current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold O or AUTO 3 until a zonenumber displays.

3. Once the zone number displays, press O orAUTO 3 repeatedly until the correct zone numberdisplays. Stop pressing the button and the mirrorwill return to normal operation. If C appears inthe compass window, the compass may needcalibration. See “Compass Calibration” listedpreviously.

2-39

Outside Power Foldaway MirrorsControls for the outsidepower mirrors are locatedon the driver door armrest.

Mirror Adjustment1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving

position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsReset the power foldaway mirrors if:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.

• The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position.

• The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirrorcontrols to reset them to their normal position. A noisemay be heard during the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manualfolding operation.

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorIf the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirroradjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by the on and off settings onthe automatic dimming rearview mirror.

2-40

Park Tilt MirrorsIf your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors,it is capable of performing the park tilt mirror feature.This feature allows the driver and passenger sidemirror to tilt to a factory programmed position whenthe vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature may beuseful in allowing you to view the curb when you areparallel parking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) andeither a five-second delay has occurred, or theignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver andpassenger side mirror will return to its originalposition.

This feature can be enabled/disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization on page 3-86 for moreinformation.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you couldhit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated Mirrors= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 3-40 for more information.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45.

2-41

Object Detection Systems

Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA)For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA) system, it operates at speeds lessthan 5mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects. It can determine how closeobjects are to the front bumper, up to 4 feet (1.2 m)in front of the vehicle and the rear bumper, up to8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle. The distance sensorsare located on the front and rear bumper.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park Assist(UFRPA) system does not replace driver vision.It cannot detect:

• objects that are below the bumper,underneath the vehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper care before movingforward and while backing; vehicle damage, injury,or death could occur. Even with UFRPA, alwayscheck in front of your vehicle before movingforward and behind your vehicle before backingup. While moving forward and backing, be sure tolook for objects and check your vehicle’s mirrors.

2-42

The front display is located on top of the instrument panelto the right of the driver. The front display will have eitherthree or six lights to provide distance and systeminformation. With Adaptive Cruise control (ACC), it willhave three lights along with the ACC lights. Without ACC,it will have six lights. High-toned beeps from the frontspeakers are for objects detected near the front bumper.

The rear display is located near the rear window and canbe seen by looking over your right shoulder. The reardisplay uses three color-coded lights to provide distanceand system information. Low-toned beeps from the rearspeakers are for the rear bumper.

How the System WorksUFRPA comes on automatically when the shift leveris moved out of P (Park). The system does notwork at a forward or reverse speed greater than5 mph (8 km/h).

To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level.Objects must also be within 4 feet (1.2 m) in front ofthe vehicle and 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.This distance may be less during warmer or humidweather.

When backing up, if objects are detected at the sametime near both the front and rear bumpers, bothcolor-coded light displays will notify you of objects closeto each bumper. If there are objects detected near bothbumpers, the beeps will only be sounded to notify thatobjects are close to the rear bumper. However, if whilethe vehicle is backing up and an object comes within1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at the same timethere is another object further than 1 ft (0.3 m) from therear bumper, then the beeps will only be sounded tonotify you of the closer object that is near the frontbumper.

The system can be disabled using the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-68 for more information.

Front Parking AssistDisplay

Rear Parking AssistDisplay

2-43

Moving ForwardWhen the vehicle is started, the front display will brieflyilluminate to let you know the system is working.

The following describes what will occur with the frontdisplay as you get closer to a object detected in thefront of the vehicle:

Description English Metric

amber/amber lightsACC — one amber light 4 ft 1.2 m

four amber lightsACC — two amber lights 40 in 1.0 m

four amber/ two red lightsACC — two amberlights/one red light

23 in 0.6 m

four amber/ two red lightsflashing and beep for

five secondsACC — two amberlights/one red light

flashing and beep forfive seconds

1 ft 0.3 m

BackingUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) comes onautomatically when the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). The rear display will then briefly illuminateto let you know the system is working.

The following describes what will occur with the reardisplay as you get closer to an object detected inthe rear of your vehicle:

Description English Metric

amber light 8 ft 2.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m

amber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m

amber/amber/red lightsflashing and beep for

five seconds1 ft 0.3 m

The system can be disabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68 for moreinformation.

2-44

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to a temporarycondition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will bedisplayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown onthe rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:

• The driver disables the system.

• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep thevehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, seeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.

• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle oran object was hanging out of the trunk during thelast drive cycle, the red light may illuminate inthe rear display. Once the attached object isremoved, URPA will return to normal operation.

• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.

• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer to repair the system.

• Other conditions may affect system performance,such as vibrations from a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled after driving forward atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system. Read this entire section before using the system.

The SBZA system operates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.







Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak (0.25V/maverage) at a distance of 3m

2-45

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio orTV interference caused by unauthorized modificationsto this equipment. Such modifications could voidthe user’s authority to operate the equipment.

{CAUTION:

SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does notreplace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:

• Vehicles outside the side blind zones whichmay be rapidly approaching.

• Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

Failure to use proper care when changing lanesmay result in damage to the vehicle, injury, ordeath. Always check the outside and rearviewmirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use theturn signal before changing lanes.

When the system detects a vehicle in the side blindzone, amber SBZA displays will light up in the sidemirrors. This indicates that it may be unsafe to changelanes. Before making a lane change, always checkthe SBZA display, check the outside and rearviewmirrors, look over your shoulder for vehicles andhazards, and use the turn signal.

SBZA Detection ZonesThe SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximatelyone lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or3.5 m. This zone starts at each side mirror andgoes back approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height ofthe zone is approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)and 6 ft. (2.0 m) off the ground.

The SBZA detection zones do not change if the vehicleis towing a trailer. So be extra careful when changinglanes while towing a trailer.

2-46

How the System Works

When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displayswill briefly come on to indicate that the system isoperating. While driving forward, the left or right sidemirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detectedin that blind zone. If you activate a turn signal and avehicle has been detected on the same side, the SBZAdisplay will flash to give you extra warning not tochange lanes.

SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle isapproaching or passing other vehicles. At speedsgreater then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays maycome on when a vehicle you have passed remains inor drops back into the detection zone.

SBZA can be disabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-67 for more information. If the SBZAis disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up during normal driving.

When the System Does Not Seem ToWork ProperlyOccasional missed alerts can occur under normalcircumstances and will increase in wet conditions.The system does not need to be serviced due to anoccasional missed alert. The number of missedalerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.

If the SBZA displays do not light up when the systemis on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system mayneed service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,the system may occasionally light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects.This is normal system operation, the vehicle doesnot need service.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

2-47

SBZA does not operate when the left or right cornersof the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90. If the DICstill displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper,see your dealer/retailer.

The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attachedto the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is extending outto either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than thedriver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turnSBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT ON option will not be selectable if theconditions for normal system operation are not met.Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met,you should not rely upon SBZA while driving.

SBZA Error MessagesThe following messages may appear in the DIC:

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF:This message indicates that the driver has turned thesystem off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE:This message indicates that the SBZA system isdisabled because the sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor may beblocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or evenheavy rainstorms. This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle doesnot need service. For cleaning, see Washing YourVehicle on page 5-90.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If thismessage appears, both SBZA displays will remain onindicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.If these displays remain on after continued driving,the system needs service. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.

2-48

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)The vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system. Read this entire section before using the system.

{CAUTION:

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system doesnot steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help youstay in your driving lane. The LDW system may not:

• Provide you with enough time to avoid a lanechange collision.

• Be loud enough for you to hear the warningbeeps.

• Work properly under bad weather conditionsor if the windshield is not kept clean.

• Detect lane markings and will not detectroad edges.

• Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a lanemarking if the system does not detect the lanemarking.



LDW will indicate the system is working wheneverit detects either the left or right lane marking. So ifyou depart on the side of the lane that LDW is notdetecting, LDW will not warn you.

If you do not carefully maintain your vehicleposition within the lane, vehicle damage, injury, ordeath could occur. Even with LDW, always keepyour attention on the road and maintain propervehicle position within the lane. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not use LDW in badweather conditions.

When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, theLDW symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.LDW will not warn you if the turn signal is on or ifyou make a sharp maneuver. Before making a lanechange, check the vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder for vehicles and hazards, and start theturn signal before changing lanes.

2-49

How the System WorksLDW uses a camera located between the inside rearviewmirror and the windshield to detect the lane markings.

@ (Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on and off,press the LDW control, located by the exterior headlampcontrol. An indicator on the control will light to indicatethat LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, the LDW symbol, located inthe instrument panel cluster, will briefly come on toindicate that the light is operational.

LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) orgreater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at thesespeeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the systemdetects a left or right lane marking. This symbol willchange to amber and flash and three beeps will sound ifyou cross a detected lane marking without using theturn signal.

If the LDW symbol does not appear, LDW is not currentlyoperating and will not warn you.

To change the volume of the warning chime, see ChimeVolume under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-86for more information.

When the System Does Not Seem ToWork ProperlyThe LDW symbol will not appear when the system ishaving difficulty seeing the lines on the road or ifthe view of the camera on the windshield is blockedwith mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshieldis damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such aswhile driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions. This isnormal operation, the vehicle does not need service.For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicleon page 5-90.

2-50

LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road, or other road imperfections.This is normal system operation, the vehicle does notneed service.

LDW Error Message

SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This messagemay appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is notworking properly. If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the system needs service.Take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE:This message may appear in the DIC if LDW does notactivate due to a temporary condition.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed to make an automaticcall to OnStar Emergency advisors who can requestemergency services be sent to your location. If thekeys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlockthe doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on mostvehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,with one trial route, is available on most vehicles.Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisorcontact Roadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Termsand Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

2-51

Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance may not be availableuntil the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select amonthly or annual subscription payment plan. If apayment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and allservices, including airbag notification and emergencyservices, may be deactivated and no longer available.For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak withan advisor.

Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.To check if this vehicle is able to provide the servicesdescribed below, or for a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) oronstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or pressthe OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar Services Available with theSafe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) orDriving Directions - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

2-52

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated intothe vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also belinked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. ora Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStaradvisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-Turn NavigationVehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigationsystem can provide voice-guided driving directions.Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisorlocate a business or address and download drivingdirections to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play through the audio systemspeakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling that uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. Press the phone button and give afew simple voice commands to browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide formore information. This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

OnStar Steering Wheel ControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can beused to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-127for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dialnumbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

2-53

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record and transmit vehicleinformation. This information is automatically sent toan OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button ispressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if theairbags or AACN system deploy. This information usuallyincludes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event ofa crash, additional information regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction from whichthe vehicle was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle alsosends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they canprovide services where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStar servicealso cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place wherethe wireless service provider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacity and reception whenthe service is needed, and technology that is compatiblewith the OnStar service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,or at all times.

Location information about the vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

The vehicle must have a working electrical system,including adequate battery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service at any particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to important parts of the vehiclein a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisorcannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttonsis red, the system may not be functioning properly.Press the OnStar button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar subscription has expired andall services have been deactivated. Press the OnStarbutton to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.

2-54

Universal Home RemoteSystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides a way toreplace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)transmitters used to activate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, and home lighting.








Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

This vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, security systems,and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

2-55

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,it may be helpful to have another person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitterfor use in other vehicles, as well as, for futureprogramming. Only the original remote controltransmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.The programmed buttons should be erased when thevehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Park the vehicle outside of the garage whenprogramming a garage door. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage door or gate that isbeing programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeFor questions or help programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go tolearcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are RollingCode units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore starting. Otherwise, the device will time out andthe procedure will have to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outsidebuttons at the same time for one to two seconds,and immediately release them.

2-56

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where thehanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-headunit and may be a colored button. Press thisbutton. After pressing this button, complete thefollowing steps in less than 30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and holdthe Universal Home Remote button that will beused to control the garage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light, above the selectedbutton, should slowly blink. This button mayneed to be held for up to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, release the buttonwhen the garage door moves. The indicator lightwill blink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,choosing a different function button in Step 3 thanwhat was used for the garage door opener.

If these instructions do not work, the garage dooropener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow theProgramming instructions that follow for a Fixed Codegarage door opener.

2-57

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFor questions or help programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go tolearcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore starting. Otherwise, the device will time outand the procedure will have to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage door opener is a FixedCode unit, remove the battery cover on the handheld transmitter supplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener motor. If there are a rowof dip switches similar to the graphic above, thegarage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If youdo not see a row of dip switches, return to theprevious section for Programming Universal HomeRemote – Rolling Code.Your hand held transmitter can have betweeneight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand oftransmitter.

2-58

The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)could also have a row of dip switches that canbe used when programming the Universal HomeRemote. If the total number of switches on the motorhead and hand held transmitter are different, or ifthe dip switch settings are different, use thedip switch settings on the motor head unit toprogram the Universal Home Remote. The motorhead dip switch settings can also be used whenthe original hand held transmitter is not available.

The panel of switches might not appear exactly asthey do in the examples above, but they shouldbe similar.The switch positions on the hand-held transmittercould be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position could be labeled as“Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position could be labeledas “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position could be labeledas “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

2-59

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings fromleft to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings written down in Step 2now become the button strokes to be enteredinto the Universal Home Remote in Step 4.Be sure to enter the switch settings written downin Step 2, in order from left to right, into theUniversal Home Remote, when completingStep 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all threebuttons at the same time for about three seconds.Release the buttons to put the Universal HomeRemote into programming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will havetwo and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.Now press one button on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch setting as follows:

• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in thevehicle.

• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in thevehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button inthe vehicle.

2-60

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,firmly press and release all three buttons at thesame time. The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button that will be used tocontrol the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light above the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This button may need to beheld for up to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when the garagedoor moves. The indicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosinga different button in Step 6 than what was used forthe garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will come on whilethe signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsAny of the three buttons can be reprogrammed byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsThe programmed buttons should be erased when thevehicle is sold or the lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at thesame time for approximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly above thebuttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release bothbuttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.

For help or information on the Universal Home RemoteSystem, call the customer assistance phone numberunder Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.

2-61

Storage Areas

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key tolock and unlock the glove box.

CupholdersThere are cupholders located in the full floor console,or in the front of the center seat console. Cupholders arealso located in the rear armrest. Slide the cover backto access the full floor console cupholder. Fold open thefront of the console to access the center seat consolecupholder.

Front Storage AreaTo access the front storage area, push down and thenrelease. Push up and forward to remove.

Center Console StorageIf the vehicle has a full floor console it has two storageareas. Lift the left lever located in the front of thearmrest lid to access the upper storage tray. Lift theright lever to access the lower storage area. If thevehicle has a center seat console it will have two storageareas. Press the button located on the front of thearmrest and lift the armrest cover to access the upperstorage area. Pull the strap located behind the cupholder to access the lower storage area.

2-62

Center Flex Storage UnitThis vehicle may have a center flex storage unit thatincludes a front center seat with a lap belt and anunderseat storage compartment. The center seatbackcan also be used as an armrest. Cupholders are alsolocated at the front edge of the storage unit and can beaccessed by folding the compartment forward.

Pull the handle rearward to open a storage compartmentand access the accessory power outlet. Pull out toremove.

When not being used, the center seat lap belt can bestored in the underseat storage compartment.

Floor MatsThe driver’s side floor mat is held in place by two hooks.

Remove the floor mat by pulling up on the rear of themat to disconnect it from the hooks.

Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the openings in thefloor mat over the hooks and push it down into place.

Properly place the driver’s side floor mat on the floor sothat it does not block the movement of the acceleratorpedal.

Rear Seat ArmrestThis vehicle may have a rear seat center console andarmrest. Open the console by pushing the buttonand lifting the cover. Inside the console aretwo cupholders that can be pulled out when using.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located in the rear, to storesmall loads as far forward as possible. The netshould not be used to store heavy loads.

2-63

SunroofThe vehicle may have a power sunroof.

The switches that operatethe sunroof are located onthe overhead console.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must beturned to ON/RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)must be active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-26.

Express Open: The express open feature will operatefrom the closed or partially open position. To expressopen the power sunroof, fully press the driver sideswitch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in adesired position other than to the express-open position,press the switch again, in either direction, to stop themovement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, itwill open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

Vent Open: From the closed position, press and holdthe passenger side switch forward to vent the sunroof.The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to thefull vent position. The sunshade must be openedmanually.

Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controlsaccording to one of the following:

• From the open position, press and hold the driverside sunroof switch forward. The sunshade mustbe closed manually.

• From the vent position, press and hold thepassenger side sunroof switch rearward.

2-64

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .........................................3-7Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System ................3-9Flash-to-Pass ...............................................3-13Windshield Wipers ........................................3-13Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-14Windshield Washer .......................................3-15Cruise Control ..............................................3-16Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-19Exterior Lamps .............................................3-29Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-32Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-33Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-33Fog Lamps ..................................................3-34Cornering Lamps ..........................................3-34Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-34Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-34

Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-35Entry Lighting ...............................................3-35Parade Dimming ...........................................3-35Reading Lamps ............................................3-35Footwell Lamps ............................................3-36Battery Load Management .............................3-36Electric Power Management ...........................3-36Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-37Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-37Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-38Ashtray(s) ....................................................3-39Analog Clock ...............................................3-39

Climate Controls ............................................3-40Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-40Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-46Rear Climate Control System .........................3-46Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-48

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-50Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-51Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-52Tachometer .................................................3-52Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-53Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-54Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-55Charging System Light ..................................3-56

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-56Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-57Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-58StabiliTrak® Indicator Light .............................3-58Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light ..............3-59Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-59Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-60Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-60Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-61Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-64Security Light ...............................................3-65Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-65Lights On Reminder ......................................3-65Cruise Control Light ......................................3-66Highbeam On Light .......................................3-66Fuel Gage ...................................................3-66

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-67DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-68DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-73DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-86

Audio System(s) .............................................3-95Setting the Clock ..........................................3-96Radio(s) (MP3) .............................................3-99Using an MP3 ............................................3-110XM Radio Messages ...................................3-115Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-116Bluetooth® .................................................3-116Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-127Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-127Radio Reception .........................................3-128Backglass Antenna ......................................3-129XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-129

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

Console-Shift Model shown, Column-Shift Model similar

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-46.B. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-67.C. Exterior Lamps on page 3-29.D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-51.E. Horn on page 3-6.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-127.G. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)

on page 2-42 and Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 3-19 (If Equipped).

H. Analog Clock on page 3-39.I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.J. Audio System(s) on page 3-95.K. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 2-13.L. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-34.M. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 2-49.N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.

O. Hood Release on page 5-11.P. Parking Brake on page 2-32.Q. Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7 (If Equipped).R. Cruise Control on page 3-16 or Adaptive Cruise

Control on page 3-19.S. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6. Power Tilt Wheel

and Telescopic Steering Column on page 3-7(If Equipped).

T. Dual Climate Control System on page 3-40.U. Traction Control System Button (Console-Shift

Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-6.

V. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 2-29.

W. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-38.X. Glove Box on page 2-62. Valet Lockout Switch on

page 2-20.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this buttonlocated on the instrument panel, to make the front andrear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.

Press | again to turn the flashers off.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel lets the steering wheel position be adjusted.

The adjustment lever islocated on the left side ofthe steering column.

Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down.Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

3-6

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

If the vehicle has thisfeature, the power tilt andtelescope wheel control islocated on the outboardside of the steering column.

Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheelup or down.

Press the control forward or rearward and the steeringwheel moves toward the front or rear of the vehicle.To set the memory position, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-86 and Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-6.

Heated Steering WheelThe vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for this featureis located on the steeringwheel.

Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A lighton the button displays while the feature is turned on.

Heating will begin in about three minutes.

3-7

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

23 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

N : Windshield Wipers

L : Windshield Washer

_ : Heated Washer Fluid

Flash-To-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is on the pages following.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster and in theoutside rearview mirrorflashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal aturn. The lever returns automatically when the turn iscomplete. If you momentarily press and release the lever,the turn signal will flash 3 times.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash tosignal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change iscomplete.

The lever returns to its starting position when it isreleased.

If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrowflashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Rear Underseat Fuse Block onpage 5-98.

3-8

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will soundand the Driver Information Center (DIC) will displayTURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remindyou to turn it off. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward to change the headlamps from lowbeam to high. Pull the lever back and then releaseit to change from high beam to low.

This light on the instrumentpanel cluster will be on,indicating high-beamusage.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read thisentire section before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.








3-9

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system providesan audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle tooquickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a visualalert with no audible alert if you are following anothervehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol is locatedon top of the instrument panel to the right of the driver.FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect avehicle directly ahead, in your path, within a distance of328 ft (100 m) and operates at speeds above 20 mph(32 km/h).

{CAUTION:

FCA is only a warning system and does not applythe brakes. When you are approaching a vehicleor object too rapidly or when you are following avehicle too closely that is ahead of you, FCA maynot provide you with enough time to avoid acollision. FCA is not designed to warn the driverof pedestrians or animals. Your complete attentionis always required while driving and you shouldbe ready to take action and apply the brakes.For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

The FCA control is locatedon the steering wheel.

To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive CruiseControl button. See Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 3-19.

FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.FCA is disabled when the indicator light is amber.

3-10

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, FCA may not detect avehicle ahead. You could crash into a vehicleahead of you. Do not rely on FCA on windingroads.

• When weather limits visibility, such as in fog,rain, or snow, FCA performance is limited.There may not be enough warning distance tothe vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on FCAin low visibility conditions.

{CAUTION:

When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive CruiseControl switch is on. If you press another AdaptiveCruise Control button, you might go into cruisewhen you do not want to. You could be startledand even lose control. Be careful not to pressadaptive cruise buttons unless you want to usecruise control.

Alerting the Driver

The FCA alert symbol willflash and a warning beepwill sound when driveraction may be required.

The alert symbol will flash when:

• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle tooquickly.

• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of youmuch too closely.

See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information.

3-11

Detecting the Vehicle AheadThe vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCAsymbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you isdetected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehiclesyou may see ahead. The symbol may disappear oncurves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when anothervehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA systemwill not detect the vehicle until it is completely in yourdriving lane.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blockedby snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicleahead. FCA may not help you avoid a collisionunder these conditions. Do not use FCA when theradar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep yourradar clean. See “Cleaning the System” underAdaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.

{CAUTION:

FCA may not detect and warn soon enough tostationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objectsahead of you. You could crash into an object aheadof you. Do not rely on FCA when approachingstationary or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.

Unnecessary AlertsFCA may occasionally provide alerts that you considerunnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicleahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationaryobjects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does notneed service.

3-12

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEANRADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICERADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.If so, you may need to turn off the engine and cleanthe lens. See “Cleaning the System” under AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps tosignal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.

The flash-to-pass feature will only work with theheadlamps on. It does not work with DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL).

Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.

If the headlamps are on low beam, pulling the turn signaltowards you will flash the high beams.

Windshield WipersTurn the band with the wiper symbol on it to control thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, hold it on mistuntil the wipers start, then release. The wipers stop afterone wipe. For more wipe cycles, hold the band longer.

6 (Delay): Use to set the delay time between wipecycles. The wiper speed can be set for a long or shortdelay between wipes. The closer the band is set tothe top of the lever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If they become wornor damaged, replace with new blades or blade inserts.Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.The vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. After thewindshield wipers have completed eight wipe cycleswithin four minutes, the headlamps automatically turn on.See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-32 for moreinformation.

3-13

Rainsense™ II WipersFor vehicles with this feature, the moisture sensor ismounted on the interior side of the windshield behind therearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate thewipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-upon the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear thewindshield depending on driving conditions and thesensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes willoccur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur morefrequently. The Rainsense II wipers operate in a delaymode as well as a continuous low or high speed asneeded. If the system is left on for long periods of time,occasional wipes may occur without any moisture onthe windshield. This is normal and indicates that theRainsense II system is activated.

The Rainsense II system can be activated by turning thewiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels indicatedon the wiper stalk. The position closest to off is the lowestsensitivity setting, level one. This setting lets more rain orsnow to collect on the windshield between wipes. Turningthe wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity levelsincreases the sensitivity of the system and frequency of

wipes. The highest sensitivity setting, level five is closestto low. A single wipe occurs each time the wiper stalk isturned to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that thesensitivity level has been increased.

Notice: Going through an automatic car wash withthe wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipersoff when going through an automatic car wash.

The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and arenot affected by the Rainsense II function. The RainsenseII system can be overridden at any time by manuallyturning the wiper band to low or high speed.

When Rainsense II is active, the headlamps turn onautomatically. The headlamps will turn off again once thewipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If it is dark,they remain on. See Wiper Activated Headlampson page 3-32 for more information.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other items onthe exterior glass surface directly in front ofthe moisture sensor. Doing this could causethe moisture sensor to malfunction.

3-14

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle,located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wiperswill clear the windshield and either stop or return to thepreset speed. For more washer cycles, press and holdthe paddle.

_ (Heated Washer Fluid): The heated windshieldwasher fluid system, if the vehicle has this feature,may be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugsfrom the windshield. Slide the control on the turn signal/multifunction lever to this position and then release, toactivate the heated windshield washer fluid system.This activation initiates four heated wash/wipe cycles.The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature.After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles. The heatedwindshield washer fluid system may be turned off at anytime by sliding the control on the turn signal/multifunctionlever to this position again.

When the heated windshield washer fluid system isactivated under certain outside temperature conditions,steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a shortperiod of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is anormal condition.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washerfluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-73.

3-15

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed of approximately 25 mph(40 km/h) or more can be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not workat speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). A cruise controllight appears in the instrument panel cluster when thecruise control is on.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use the cruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control automatically turns off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-6. When roadconditions let you safely use it again, the cruisecontrol can be turned back on.

3-16

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise control buttonsare located on left side ofthe steering wheel.

I (On): Turns on the cruise control system.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make thevehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.

SET– (Set): Press to set the speed.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control.

Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, orif the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.

The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster comeson after the cruise control has been set to the desiredspeed.

1. Press I .

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET– button located on the steeringwheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

3-17

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose the cruise control is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied. This shuts off thecruise control. But it does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES (resume/accelerate)button to return to the desired preset speed. The cruiselight displays again.

The vehicle returns to and stays at the preset speed.If you press and hold the +RES button, the vehiclespeed increases until the button is released or the brakeis applied. Do not hold in the +RES button, if you donot want the vehicle speed to increase.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the SET– button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. The vehiclenow cruises at the higher speed.

• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until thedesired speed is reached, and then releasethe button. To increase the vehicle speed in verysmall amounts, briefly press the +RES buttonand then release it. Each time this is done, thevehicle accelerates approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

The accelerate feature only works after the cruisecontrol speed is set by pressing the SET– button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET– button until the lower speeddesired is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET– button briefly. Each time this is done, thevehicle slows down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

3-18

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicleslows down to the previous cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control works on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you might have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Applyingthe brake or shifting into a lower gear ends cruise control.If you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear dueto the grade of the downhill slope, you might not want toattempt to use the cruise control feature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased whenthe cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlFor vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entiresection before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.








Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an enhancementto traditional cruise control. It allows you to keepcruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditionswithout having to constantly reset your cruise control.

3-19

ACC uses radar to detect a vehicle directly aheadin your path, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), andoperates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). When itis engaged by the driver, the system can apply limitedbraking or acceleration of the vehicle automaticallyto maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicleahead. Braking is limited to 0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2)of deceleration, which is comparable to moderateapplication of the vehicle’s brakes. To disengage ACC,apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the vehiclewill react like traditional cruise control.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard brakingor bring the vehicle to a complete stop. It will notrespond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians oranimals. When you are approaching a vehicle orobject, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have timeto slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.Your complete attention is always required whiledriving and you should be ready to take actionand apply the brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Controlmay not detect a vehicle ahead. You couldcrash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not useAdaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.

• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have timeto slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crashwhen you are driving in conditions wherevehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead ofyou, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’spath. If you are driving in these conditions, donot use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warningbeep and alert symbol may indicate that youare driving in conditions where Adaptive CruiseControl should not be used. See “Alerting theDriver” in this section.

• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire tractioncan cause needless wheel spinning, and youcould lose control. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.


3-20


• When weather limits visibility, such as when infog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive CruiseControl performance is limited. There may notbe enough distance to adapt to the changingtraffic conditions. Do not use cruise controlwhen visibility is low.

The ACCs are located on the steering wheel.

The cruise control buttons are located on left side of thesteering wheel.

] (On): Press to turn the system on.

+ Res (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make thevehicle resume to a previously set speed or to increasethe set speed when ACC is already active.

Set– : Press to set the speed or to decrease the setspeed when ACC is already active.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel ACC.

+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press toincrease the distance between your vehicle and othervehicles.

−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press todecrease the distance between your vehicle and othervehicles.

ACC will not work if the master cylinder brake fluid levelis low.

3-21

Engaging ACC With the Set Button

{CAUTION:

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switchon when you are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do not wantto. You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off untilyou want to use cruise control.

The set speed is selected by the driver. This is thespeed your vehicle will travel if there is no vehicledetected in its path.

To set ACC, do the following:

1. Press the ] button.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press in the SET– button and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Once ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes ifit detects a vehicle ahead is too close or moving slowerthan your vehicle.

The on symbol is located on the display at the top of theinstrument panel to the right of the driver. When the onsymbol is lit on the display, it indicates that ACC is active.

A message on the DIC will also display when ACC isset. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.

Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.

If the vehicle is in ACC when the traction control systembegins to limit wheel spin, the ACC will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6 and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. Whenroad conditions allow you to safely use it again, the ACCcan be turned back on.

Increasing Set Speed While Using ACCThere are two ways to increase the set speed:

• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.Press the SET– button and then release thebutton and the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higher speed.

• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until thedesired set speed is displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), then release the switch.To increase the set speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to +RES. Each time this isdone, the set speed increases by 1 mph (1 km/h).

3-22

Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until thesystem determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to theset speed.

Decreasing Set Speed While Using ACCPress the SET– button until you reach the lower speeddesired, then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press theSET– button. Each time this is done, the set speeddecreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose the ACC is set at a desired speed and thenthe brakes are applied. This will turn off the ACC.But it does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h)or more, press the +RES button. ACC will be engagedwith the previously chosen set speed.

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it willadjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the followdistance (gap) you select.

Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheelto adjust the follow distance.

Press the plus button to increase the distance or theminus button to decrease the distance. The first buttonpress shows the current follow distance setting onthe DIC. The current follow distance setting will bemaintained until it is changed.

There are six follow distances to choose from.The follow distance selection ranges from near to far(one second to two seconds follow time). The distancemaintained for a selected follow distance will vary basedon vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed the furtherback your vehicle will follow. Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the follow distance. The rangeof selectable distances may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions. If you prefer to travel ata follow distance farther than ACC allows, disengagethe system and drive manually.

3-23

Alerting the Driver

The ACC alert symbol islocated on the display atthe top of the instrumentpanel to the right of thedriver.

The alert symbol flashes and a warning beep soundswhen driver action may be required. If ACC is engaged,the alert symbol will flash when:

• ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because youare approaching a vehicle too rapidly.

• The vehicle speed drops below about20 mph (32 km/h).

• A temporary condition prohibits ACC from operating.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 formore information.

• A malfunction is detected in the system. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-73 for moreinformation.

See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited brakingability to slow your vehicle. In some cases, AdaptiveCruise Control may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be ready totake action and apply the brakes yourself.See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

Approaching and Following a Vehicle

The vehicle ahead symbolis located on the top of theinstrument panel to theright of the driver.

The vehicle ahead symbol only appears when a vehicleis detected in your path.

If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,ACC will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.

3-24

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blockedby snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicleahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not have timeto slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when theradar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep yourradar clean. See “Cleaning the System” later inthis section.

ACC automatically slows your vehicle down whenapproaching a slower moving vehicle. It then adjustsyour vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at theselected follow distance. Your vehicle speed increasesor decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but willnot exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,if necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights willcome on. Braking may feel or sound different than if youwere applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect andreact to stationary or slow-moving vehicles orother objects ahead of you. You could crash intoan object ahead of you. Do not use AdaptiveCruise Control when approaching stationaryor slow-moving vehicles or other objects.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and reactto stationary or slow-moving vehicles or otherobjects ahead of you. Your vehicle may acceleratetoward objects, such as a stopped vehicle thatsuddenly appears after the lead vehicle changeslanes. Your complete attention is always requiredwhile driving and you should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes.

3-25

Low-Speed DeactivationIf your vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) whilefollowing a vehicle ahead, ACC will begin to disengage.The Driver Alert symbol will flash and the warning beepwill sound. The driver must take action since ACC will notslow the vehicle to a stop.

Passing a Vehicle/ACC OverrideTo increase speed to pass a vehicle, use theaccelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the systemwill not automatically apply the brakes. A message willappear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73. Once you remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, ACC will return to normal operationand be able to apply the brakes, if needed.

{CAUTION:

If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,the system will not automatically apply the brakes.You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedalwhen using Adaptive Cruise Control.

Curves in the Road

{CAUTION:

Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations incurves, it may respond to a vehicle in anotherlane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into a vehicle aheadof you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready to use the brakesif necessary. Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It mayreduce your vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.

3-26

When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACCcould lose track of the vehicle in your lane and accelerateyour vehicle. When this happens the Vehicle Aheadsymbol will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane andapply the brakes.

ACC may, occasionally, provide a driver alert and/orbraking that you consider unnecessary. It could respondto signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects whenentering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation.Your vehicle does not need service.

3-27

Highway Exit Ramps

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of thevehicle ahead and accelerate up to your setspeed while entering or on highway exit ramps.You could be startled by this acceleration andeven lose control of the vehicle. DisengageAdaptive Cruise Control before entering a highwayexit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlwhile entering or on exit ramps.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, ACC willnot detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane.Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself.

Using ACC on Hills and When Towing aTrailer

How well ACC will work on hills and when towing atrailer depends on your vehicle’s speed, vehicle load,traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It maynot detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on hills.When going up steep hills, you may want to use theaccelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle’s speed. Whengoing downhill, especially when towing a trailer, you maywant to brake to keep your speed down. Applying thebrake disengages the system. You may choose not touse ACC on steep hills, especially when towing a trailer.

Disengaging ACCTo turn off the system, apply the brake pedal, press thecancel button, or press the ACC button.

3-28

Erasing Set Speed MemoryPress the ACC button or turn the ignition off.

Other MessagesThere are three additional messages that may appearon the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.These messages will appear to indicate a problemwith the ACC. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73 for more information.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.If so, you may need to turn off the engine and cleanthe lens. Remember, do not use ACC in icy conditions,or when visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.

The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.

To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a softcloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage theACC. If you are unable to do so, see your dealer/retailer.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps controlis located on the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

3-29

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps except forDaytime Running Lamps (DRL).

AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on theheadlamps at normal brightness, together with thefollowing:• Parking Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights• IntelliBeam™

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lampstogether with the following:• Instrument Panel Lights• License Plate Lamps• Taillamps• Side Marker Lamps

The parking brake indicator light comes on and stayson while the parking lamps are on with the engineoff and the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the previously listed lamps. A warning chime soundsif the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is offand the headlamps are on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control toturn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-34.

IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control SystemFor vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entiresection before using it.

IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle’sheadlamp system. Using a digital light sensor onthe rearview mirror, this system turns the vehicle’shigh-beam headlamps on and off according tosurrounding traffic conditions.

The IntelliBeam system turns the high-beam headlampson when it is dark enough, there is no other trafficpresent, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the insiderear view mirror. The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirrorturns on to indicate the system is on. Once the systemhas been turned on, it remains on each time the vehicleis started, but the IntelliBeam system must be enabled.

To enable the IntelliBeam system, turn the exterior lampcontrol to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever inits neutral position. The High-Beam On Light appears onthe instrument panel cluster when the high-beams are on.See Highbeam On Light on page 3-66.

3-30

Driving with IntelliBeam™IntelliBeam only activates the high-beams when drivingover 20 mph (32 km/h).

The high-beam headlamps remain on, under theautomatic control of IntelliBeam, until any of thefollowing situations occur:

• The system detects an approaching vehicle’sheadlamps.

• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.

• The outside light is bright enough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).

• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to thehigh-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature isused. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 3-9 and Flash-to-Pass on page 3-13.When either of these conditions occur, theIntelliBeam feature is disabled and the IntelliBeamlight in the mirror turns off until the high-beamstalk is returned to the neutral position.

• If IntelliBeam was using low-beams prior to thisaction, the IntelliBeam feature is temporarily disableduntil the stalk is returned to the neutral position.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to any settingexcept AUTO.

When this occurs, IntelliBeam is disabled until thecontrol is turned back to the AUTO position.

• The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the insiderearview mirror.

IntelliBeam might not turn off the high-beams if thesystem cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because ofany of the following:

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,snow, and/or road spray.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected dueto dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,mist, or other airborne obstructions.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, orobstructed by something that blocks the view ofthe IntelliBeam light sensor.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,haze, or other obstructions.

• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end ofthe vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeamsensor to aim high and not detect headlamps andtaillamps.

• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

3-31

You might need to manually disable or cancel thehigh-beam headlamps by turning the low-beamheadlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.

Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ atthe Rearview MirrorIntelliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on theinside rearview mirror.

AUTO 3 (On/Off): Press this button on the insiderearview mirror to disable the system. The IntelliBeamindicator turns off and does not come back on untilthe IntelliBeam button is pressed again.

When IntelliBeam has turned on the high-beams, pull orpush the high-beam stalk. This will disable IntelliBeam.The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror turns off. To turnIntelliBeam back on, press the IntelliBeam button on themirror.

A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer/retailer diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holdingthis button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam indicatorlight flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this,the vehicle’s setting automatically is reset when theignition is turned off and then on again.

Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor

The light sensor is locatedon the inside of the vehiclein front of the insiderearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glasscleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor window.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of thesensor window.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parking lampsafter the windshield wipers are turned on and havecompleted eight wipe cycles within four minutes.

When the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, thewiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if thewindshield wipers are turned off.

3-32

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp controlis left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp positionand the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime running lamps are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes the turn signal lamps come onwhen the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.

• The transmission is not in P (Park)(United States only).

• The light sensor is covered or not detecting light.See “Sensors” under Dual Climate Control Systemon page 3-40.

When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as theparking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRLare being used. The instrument panel will not be litup either.

When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enoughoutside, the turn signal lamps turn off and normallow-beam headlamp operation occurs.

When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enoughoutside, the regular lamps go off, and the DRL takes over.If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system comes on immediately. Once youleave the garage, it will take approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL ifthere is light outside. During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make surethe instrument panel brightness knob is in the full brightposition. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-34.

Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps willdeactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog lampswere turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn offautomatic lighting and shift the transmission into P (Park).Placing the vehicle in P (Park) disables the DRL. TheDRL will stay off until the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automaticlighting and manually turn on the parking lamps orfog lamps, if the vehicle has them.

The regular headlamp system should be turned onwhen needed.

3-33

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions.

The fog lamps button is located on the exterior lampscontrol to the left of the steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps button toturn the fog lamps on or off. A light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster when the fog lamps are in use.The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps come back onagain when the high-beam headlamps are turned off.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps tobe on along with the fog lamps.

Cornering LampsThe cornering lamps come on when the headlampsor parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with themultifunction lever. They provide more light for cornering.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the exterior lamp button has been left on, the exteriorlamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF and a door has been opened. Thisprotects against draining the battery if the headlampsor parking lamps are accidentally left on. If you need toleave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, use theexterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on after theignition is turned to LOCK/OFF and any door is opened.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This featurecontrols the brightness of the instrument panel andfootwell lights, if equipped.

The button for this control is located below the exteriorlamps control.

Push the button in and release to extend the button.Turn the button clockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights.

3-34

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps are located on the headliner abovethe rear seat. These lamps come on by turning theinstrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or whenany door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle lampsare located on the bottom of the front and rear door trim.

Professional vehicles have an additional dome lampand also opera lamps.

Entry LightingThis feature turns on the courtesy lamps and thebacklighting for the door switches and the exterior lampcontrol when a door is opened or if the remote keylessentry transmitter unlock button is pressed. If activateddue to the transmitter, the lighting remains active forabout 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting systemuses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in orderfor the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy lampsturn off approximately 25 seconds after the last door isclosed. They will dim to off if the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, or immediately deactivate if the power locksare activated.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays andbacklighting during daylight hours when the key is inthe ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature isfully automatic. When the light sensor reads darknessoutside and the parking lamps are active, the digitaldisplays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panelbrightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwiseto brighten lighting.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overhead consoleon the headliner and in the rear door opening. Theselamps come on automatically when any door is openedand it is dark outside.

For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.Press it again to turn them off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shutoff 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

3-35

Footwell LampsFor vehicles with footwell lamps, they are locatedunder the instrument panel and at the rear of thefront seats. These lamps provide soft light to the frontand rear floor areas. They dim with the instrumentpanel cluster lights.

Footwell lighting brightness can be adjusted with theinstrument panel brightness control located below theexterior lamps control. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 3-34. The footwell lights will turn off beforethe instrument panel lights are at their lowest level ofbrightness.

Battery Load ManagementThis feature monitors the vehicle’s electrical load anddetermines when the battery is in a heavy dischargecondition. During times of high electrical loading, theengine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm)setting than normal to make sure the battery charges.High electrical loads may occur when several of thefollowing are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,rear window defogger, the climate control fan at highspeeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.

If the battery continues to discharge, even with theengine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electricalloads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,the rear window defogger may take slightly longerto clear the glass, the heated seats may not get aswarm as they usually do and the climate control fanmay cut back to a lower speed. For more batterysaving information, see “Battery Saver Active Message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge.It then adjusts the voltage for best performance andextended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltageis raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, the voltage is loweredslightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gage or a voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), you may see the voltagemove up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,an alert will be displayed.

3-36

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electricalloads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator (alternator) may notbe spinning fast enough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan athigh speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailerloads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’s outputand the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engineidle speed to generate more power, whenever needed.It can temporarily reduce the power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, withoutbeing noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) messagemight be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If thismessage is displayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-73.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s batteryagainst drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When theignition is turned off, the power to these features willautomatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will berestored for an additional 10 minutes if any door or trunkis opened, or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature helps prevent the battery from beingdrained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/maplamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentallyleft on. If any of these lamps are left on, theyautomatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignitionis off. The lamps will not come back on again untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then onagain.

The headlamps will time-out after 10 minutes, if they aremanually turned on with the ignition on or off.

3-37

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.

If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet islocated inside the lower storage area. There are outletsalso on the right front lower part of the driver’s seat andunder the climate control system next to the ashtray.See Center Console Storage on page 2-62.

There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seatarea located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.

There may be a small cap that must be removed toaccess the accessory power outlet. When not usingthe outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.

The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged infor an extended period of time while the vehicle isoff will drain the battery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatibleto the accessory power outlet and could result in blownvehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problemsee your dealer/retailer for additional information on theaccessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to thevehicle can damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceeding maximum amperage ratingof 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Follow the proper installation instructions that areincluded with any electrical equipment you install.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by the warranty. Do not hangany type of accessory or accessory bracket fromthe plug because the power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only.

3-38

Ashtray(s)Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable itemsare put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage the vehicle. Never put flammable itemsin the ashtray.

Front AshtrayWith the full floor console, the ashtray is located belowthe climate control system. To open, push down andthen release the cover. To clean the ashtray, pushthe lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the oppositeside of the ashtray’s lip to install.

For vehicles without the floor console, pull the traylocated below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledgelocated at the top of the ashtray.

Rear AshtrayThe ashtrays are located on the door armrests.To use an ashtray, lift the lid.

Analog ClockThe analog clock is located on the instrument panelabove the radio. The clock is not connected withany other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjustthe clock:

1. Locate the adjustment button directly below theclock face.

2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advancethe clock hands. Holding the button down willcause the clock to advance faster. Release thebutton before reaching the desired time.

3. Push and release the button to increase the timeby one minute increments until the desired time isreached.

3-39

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle canbe controlled with this system.

A. Fan ControlB. DisplayC. Air Delivery Mode

ControlD. Driver and

PassengerTemperatureControls

E. Air ConditioningF. Outside Air or AUXG. RecirculationH. PASS (Passenger

Climate Control)I. Rear Window

Defogger

Dual Climate Control System

Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles withRear Climate Control

3-40

Automatic Operation

AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position isselected on the fan control, the system adjusts thefan speed. If the OnStar® system is activated whenthis position is selected, the climate control fan speedwill lower.

AUTO (Automatic Mode):

1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.

2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.

3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable settingbetween 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or coolany faster. In cold weather, the system will start atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air intothe vehicle until warmer air is available. The systemstarts out blowing air at the floor but may changemodes automatically as the vehicle warms up tomaintain the chosen temperature setting. The lengthof time needed to warm the interior depends on theoutside temperature and temperature of the vehicle.

4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilizein order for the system to regulate automatically.Then adjust the temperature as necessary tofind your comfort setting.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center ofthe instrument panel near the windshield. For moreinformation on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” laterin this section.

After the vehicle is started, the display shows theinterior temperature settings and the outsidetemperature.

If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or modecontrol, the system automatically controls the airconditioning compressor. The A/C compressor willrun automatically even at cool outside temperaturesin order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator lightis lit when the system is operating automatically, evenat near freezing outside temperatures. Press # on thefan control to turn off the A/C. For improved windowclearing performance in defog or defrost modes, theA/C compressor runs automatically.

h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO position isselected on either the fan or mode control, the systemautomatically controls the air inlet to supply fresh outsideair or recirculate the interior air to cool the car faster.The light on the recirculation button will come on whenthe system changes to recirculation. Outside air can beforced by pressing h when the light is lit. For vehicleswithout rear climate controls, press : to force outsideair. The next time AUTO fan or mode is selected, the airinlet will reset back to AUTO operation.

3-41

Manual Operation

9 (Off): Turns the entire climate control system off.Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed tothe floor. The airflow direction and temperature canbe adjusted, as indicated below.

If the temperature is adjusted while the system is off,the display will light to show the current settings.

wx (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press theup or down buttons next to the fan control to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

wx (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):Press the up or down buttons next to the air deliverymode control to manually increase or decrease thetemperature for the front passenger. If the passengerclimate control system is off, pressing one of thesebuttons turns it on.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fan speed. Turning thiscontrol completely counterclockwise will turn on theautomatic fan operation. If the airflow seems lowwhen the fan speed is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filter may need to bereplaced. See Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 3-48.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.

Select one of the following:

AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode operation.

F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument paneloutlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrumentpanel and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmerair to the floor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with someair directed to the side window outlets and the windshield.

If recirculation is selected, it only stays on forthree minutes to reduce windshield fogging.

W (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of fogor moisture. Air is directed to the floor outlets, with someair going to the side window outlets and windshield.When selected, the system turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.

3-42

0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield offog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshieldand side window outlets. When selected, the systemautomatically turns off recirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor, unless the outside temperatureis at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle untilall the windows are clear.

For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flowthrough the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press theAUX button on the front climate control system so thatthe light is not lit.

# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off and override the automaticsystem. When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressorcomes on automatically, as necessary. To avoid windowfogging on rainy and humid days at temperatures abovefreezing, run the air conditioning.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so a small amount of water may drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air modeon or off. An indicator light comes on to show it is on.Air is pulled from outside the vehicle. Pressing ? willcancel this mode.

? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculationmode on or off. An indicator light below the buttoncomes on to show that this mode is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. This mode cannot be selectedwhile in the defog or defrost modes. If you try to select therecirculation mode, the indicator light flashes three timesand turns off.

Operation in this mode during periods of high humidityand cool outside temperatures may result in increasedwindow fogging. If window fogging is experienced, selectthe defrost mode.

AUX: For vehicles with a rear climate control system,press to turn the rear climate control fan on for automaticoperation. After the AUX button is pressed, the indicatorlight comes on. Press the button again to turn theauxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate Control Systemon page 3-46.

PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to turn thepassenger climate control systems on or off. When thepassenger climate control system is on, the passengertemperature setting is displayed. The temperatureselected by the front passenger also controls the rearsystem air temperature unless the rear seat passengersselect their own comfort setting.

If the PASS button is pressed to turn the passengertemperature setting off, the driver’s temperature knobwill control the temperature for the entire vehicle.

3-43

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow fromthe rear window as possible. The rear window defoggerwill turn off approximately 20 minutes after the button ispressed if the vehicle is moving at slower vehicle speeds.At higher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger may stay oncontinuously. Each additional press will run the defoggerfor approximately 10 minutes.

The heated outside rearview mirrors will turn on to helpclear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defogger is on.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.These actions may damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middleof the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will notwork properly.

3-44

There is also an interiortemperature sensorlocated next to the steeringwheel that measures thetemperature of the airinside the vehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensor locatedbehind the front grille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehiclecould cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.

In order to prevent false temperature readings atstartup, the displayed temperature will not changeuntil the following occurs:

• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h) for5 minutes.

• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h) for2 and a half minutes.

The climate control system uses the information fromthese sensors to maintain your comfort setting byadjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the airdelivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculationmode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlettemperatures.

3-45

Outlet AdjustmentFor the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located beloweach outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use thethumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the airflowor to open the outlets and re-direct the air.

For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up ordown to change the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of your vehicle moreeffectively.

Rear Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with a rear climate control system, the rearseat passengers can adjust the direction of the airflow,fan speed and temperature for the rear seating area.This system also works with the main climate controlsystem in the vehicle.

The rear climate control system is located on the backof the center console.

A. DisplayB. Fan Control

C. Temperature ControlD. Air Delivery Mode

Control

3-46

AUX (Auxiliary): Press the AUX button located onthe front climate control panel to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off. When turned on the rear systemoperates in automatic mode and the temperature settingsselected for the front climate control panel will also beselected for the rear passengers.

To adjust the rear climate control system, the rearpassenger can select a different temperature, modeor fan speed. Whenever the rear passengers haveadjusted settings on the rear climate control system,the AUX light is lit on the front climate control system.

When the front climate control system is turned offor in defrost mode, the rear climate control system isturned off. The rear system will turn back on onceanother front mode is selected.

For more information on how to use the front climatecontrol system, see Dual Climate Control Systemon page 3-40. For more information on the air outlets,see Outlet Adjustment on page 3-46.

Automatic Operation

«Aª (Fan Control): Press until AUTO appears onthe display to place the system in automatic mode. Whenautomatic operation is active, the system automaticallycontrols the fan speed. If in auto fan mode, pressing theup arrow button will cancel automatic operation andplaces the system in manual mode. If in auto mode,pressing the down arrow will turn the rear climatecontrol system off.

«Nª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press untilAUTO appears on the display to place the systemin automatic mode. When automatic operation isactive, the system controls the air delivery mode.

3-47

Manual Operation

«Aª (Fan Control): Press to increase or decreasethe fan speed.

« bª (Temperature Control): Press to increase ordecrease the temperature for the rear seat passengers.Once the rear temperature setting is changed fromfollowing the front temperature setting, it will no longerfollow changes to the front temperature setting untilthe front climate control AUX button resets it.

«Nª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press thesebuttons to change the air delivery mode. If in AUTOair delivery mode, pressing the up arrow button willcancel automatic operation and place the system inmanual mode.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to the upper outlets.

% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the upper outletsand the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter traps most of thepollen from the air entering the vehicle. The filter mayneed to be changed periodically. For how often to changethe passenger compartment air filter, see ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

The access panel for the passenger compartment airfilter is located under the hood near the windshield,on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

3-48

To access the passenger compartment air filter:

1. Use a tool to remove the cover. If the vehicle hastabs that allow the cover to be unlatched with yourfingers, a tool will not be needed for this step.

2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located onthe inboard side of the air filter compartment tocarefully pry the pin out.

3-49

3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the airfilter and the compartment wall on the outboard sideof the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin holdingthe air filter in place. Gently remove the air filter andany loose debris that may be inside the air filtercompartment.

4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you heara click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap thecover into place.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine isstarted to indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to indicate a problem withthe vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of the gages shows there maybe a problem, check the section that explains what to do.Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.

3-50

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It show how fast the vehicle is going,how much fuel has been used and many of the other things needed drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-51

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-68 for more information.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. The vehicle’s odometer works togetherwith the driver information center. Trip A and Trip Bcan be set on the odometer. See “Trip Fuel” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68 for moreinformation.

If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one is set to the correct mileage total of the oldodometer.

Tachometer

This gage indicatesthe engine speedin revolutions perminute (rpm).

3-52

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a chime sounds forseveral seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt lightcomes on and stays onfor several seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled, neither the chime northe light comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder LightSeveral seconds after the engine is started, achime sounds for several seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occursif the passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-64 for more information.The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrumentpanel, comes on and stays on for several seconds andthen flashes for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if the passengerremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither thechime nor the light comes on.

The front passenger safety belt warning light andchime may turn on if an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off the warning light and orchime, remove the object from the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

3-53

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag’s electrical system forpossible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicatesthere is an electrical problem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 1-55.

The airbag readiness lightflashes for a few secondswhen the engine is started.If the light does not comeon then, have it fixedimmediately.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while driving, itmeans the airbag system might not be workingproperly. The airbags in the vehicle might notinflate in a crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbagDriver Information Center (DIC) message can also comeon. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73for more information.

3-54

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorThe vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-64 forimportant safety information. The overhead consolehas a passenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for onand off, for several seconds as a system check.

If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from adistance, if equipped, you may not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,to let you know the status of the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag are enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there maybe a problem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-54for more information, including important safetyinformation.


3-55

Charging System Light

This light comes on brieflywhen the ignition key isturned to START, butthe engine is not running,as a check to show itis working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stayson, or comes on while driving, there could be a problemwith the charging system. A charging system messagein the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 formore information. This light could indicate that thereare problems with a generator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with thelight on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and airconditioner.

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part is not working, the other part can stillwork and stop the vehicle. For good braking both partsneed to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspected right away.

This light comes on briefly when the engine is turnedon. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.


3-56

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight also comes on when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parking brake doesnot release fully. If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, it means there is a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the roadand stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push,or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longerto stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.

{CAUTION:

The brake system might not be working properly ifthe brake system warning light is on. Driving withthe brake system warning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after the vehicle hasbeen pulled off the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

For vehicles withthe Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this lightcomes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If thelight comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, orcomes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warning light is not on, thevehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicledoes not have antilock brakes and there is a problem withthe regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-56.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 forall brake related DIC messages.

3-57

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

This warning light comeson briefly while starting theengine.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system is working normally theindicator light will then go off.

If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there maybe a problem with the traction control system and thevehicle needs service. When this warning light is on,the system will not limit wheel spin.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on when the system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-6 for more information.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

For vehicles with theStabiliTrak® system, thislight comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.


If the light comes on and stays on while driving, therecould be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and thevehicle might need service. When this warning light ison, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limitwheel spin.

The light flashes if the system is active and is workingto assist the driver with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for moreinformation.

3-58

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Light

For vehicles with the lanedeparture warning system,this light briefly comeson amber, while startingthe vehicle, to indicatethat it is working.


When driving at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or greaterand LDW is turned on, a green warning symbol appearswhen the system has detected lane markings on atleast one side of the vehicle.

For more information see Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 2-49.

When LDW is active, the amber warning symbol comeson and flashes. Three beeps sound if a lane markingis crossed without using the turn signal. If the warningsymbol is not on, LDW is not operating and will notwarn when the vehicle crosses a lane marking.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight comes on whenthe engine is very hot.

This light also comes on briefly when the vehicle isstarted.

If the light does not go out or comes on and stays onwhile driving, there may be a problem with the coolingsystem. Driving with engine coolant temperature lighton could cause the vehicle to overheat, see OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30.See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-73 for more information.

3-59

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

It indicates when the engine has warmed up and ifthe cooling system is operating properly. If the gagepointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolantis too hot and the engine coolant temperature warninglight comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tirepressure monitoringsystem, this light comeson briefly when the engineis started.

It provides information about tire pressures and theTire Pressure Monitoring System.

3-60

When the Light is On SteadyThis indicates that one or more of the tires is significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), can accompany the light. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-73 for moreinformation. Stop and check the tires as soon as it issafe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to theproper pressure. See Tires on page 5-48 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On SteadyThis indicates that there could be a problem with theTire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for abouta minute and stays on steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light should come onwhen the ignition is on, butthe engine is not running,as a check to show itis working. If it does not,have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, whilethe engine is running, this indicates that there is anOBD II problem and service is required.

3-61

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.This system assists the service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven withthis light on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacement of the originaltires with other than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’semission controls and can cause this light tocome on. Modifications to these systems couldlead to costly repairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. This could also result in a failure to passa required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during a malfunction in one oftwo ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damagethe emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo beinghauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restartthe engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soonas possible.

3-62

Light On Steady: An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

An emission system malfunction might be corrected bydoing the following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed.See Filling the Tank on page 5-7. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddleof water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.The condition is usually corrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few driving trips should turn thelight off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and can cause: stalling afterstart-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed intogear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration. These conditionsmight go away once the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.

If none of the above have made the light turn off, yourdealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that might havedeveloped.

3-63

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know to help the vehicle passan inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on with the engine running, or if thekey is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection.This can happen if the battery has recentlybeen replaced or if the battery has run down.The diagnostic system is designed to evaluatecritical emission control systems during normaldriving. This can take several days of routine driving.If this has been done and the vehicle still doesnot pass the inspection for lack of OBD II systemreadiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancecan damage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

3-64

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. If the system is working normallythe indicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oilis not flowing through the engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it might have some other systemproblem.

Security Light

For information regardingthis light and the vehicle’ssecurity system, seeContent Theft-Deterrenton page 2-21.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comeson when the fog lampsare in use.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.See Fog Lamps on page 3-34 for more information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 for more information.

3-65

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever the cruisecontrol is set.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turnedoff. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9for more information.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately howmuch fuel is in the tank.It works only whenthe engine is on.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage appears in the Driver Information Centerand a single chime sounds. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-73 for more information.

3-66

Here are a few situations that may occur with the fuelgage. All of these situations are normal and do notindicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• The gage may change when the vehicle is turning,stops quickly or accelerates quickly.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tankthan the gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated that the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the statusof many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also usedto display warning/status messages. All messages willappear in the DIC display located at the bottom of theinstrument panel cluster, below the tachometer andspeedometer. The DIC buttons are located on theinstrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a shortdelay, the DIC will display the information that waslast displayed before the engine was turned off.

The top line of the DIC display shows the vehiclesystem information and the warning/status messages.The bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometeron the left side. The bottom line of the DIC displayalso shows a digital speedometer on the right side.

If a problem is detected, a warning message will appearon the display. Be sure to take any message thatappears on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

3-67

DIC Operation and Displays

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) has differentdisplays which can beaccessed by pressing theDIC buttons located onthe instrument panel, to theleft of the steering wheel.

3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through thetrip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items”following for more information on these displays.

T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information displays. See “VehicleInformation Display Menu Items” following for moreinformation on these displays.

U Customization: Press this button to scroll througheach of the customization features. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-86 for more information onthe customization features.

V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DIC warning messagesand clear them from the DIC display.

yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll upand down the menu items.

Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items canbe displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:

TRIP A or TRIP BThese displays show the current distance traveled sincethe last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at thesame time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zeroseparately by pressing and holding the set/reset buttonfor a few seconds while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

3-68

FUEL RANGEThis display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drivewithout refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is basedon the current driving conditions and will change if thedriving conditions change. For example, if you are drivingin traffic and making frequent stops, the display may readone number, but if you enter the freeway, the numbermay change even though you still have the same amountof fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces better fuel economy than citydriving.

Once the range drops below an estimated40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will showFUEL RANGE LOW.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 formore information.

AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)This display shows the approximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).This number is calculated based on the numberof mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time thisdisplay was reset. To reset this display, press theset/reset button. The display will return to zero.

INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)This display shows the current fuel economy in eithermiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economythat the vehicle has right now and will change frequentlyas driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,this display cannot be reset.

FUEL USEDThis display shows the number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.To reset this display, press the set/reset button.The display will return to zero.

TIMER ON/OFFThis display can be used like a stopwatch. You canrecord the time it takes to travel from one point toanother. To access the timer, press the trip/fuelbutton until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.

To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button untilTIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.

To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button againuntil TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop anddisplay the end timing value.

To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset buttonafter the timer has been stopped. The display will returnto zero.

3-69

AVERAGE SPEEDThis display shows the average speed of the vehicle ineither miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).This average is calculated based on the various vehiclespeeds recorded since the last reset of this display.To reset this display, press the set/reset button.The display will return to zero.

BATTERY VOLTAGEThis display shows the current battery voltage. If thevoltage is in the normal range, the value will display.For example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will showLOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show HIGH.Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage basedon the state of the battery. The battery voltage mayfluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.This is normal. See Charging System Light on page 3-56for more information.

If there is a problem with the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-73 and Electric PowerManagement on page 3-36 for more information.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Display MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): The following displaymenu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicleinformation button:

OIL LIFE REMAININGIf the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oillife remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means that 99% of the current oil liferemains.

When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear on the display. You shouldchange the oil as soon as possible. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-13.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself aftereach oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset the engineoil life system, See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.The display will show 100% when the system is reset.

3-70

UNITSThis display allows you to select between English orMetric units of measurement. Once in this display, pressthe set/reset button to select between ENGLISH orMETRIC units.

PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows thesystem to be turned on or off. Once in this display, pressthe set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will be turned on. If you chooseOFF, the system will be turned off. The UFRPA systemautomatically turns back on after each vehicle start.When the UFRPA system is turned off and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park), the DIC will display the PARKINGASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the systemhas been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73 and Ultrasonic Front and Rear ParkingAssist (UFRPA) on page 2-42 for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTIf your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system, this display allows the system to be turned onor off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the systemwill be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be

turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off, the DICwill display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFFmessage as a reminder that the system has been turnedoff. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 andSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45 for moreinformation.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESOn vehicles with the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown ineither pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until the DICdisplays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.Press the vehicle information button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected bythe system while driving, a message advising youto check the pressure in a specific tire will appear inthe display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73 formore information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead ofa value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If thisconsistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.

3-71

SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH (SPEED LIMIT:XXX Km/h) or ADVISORY: XXX MPH(ADVISORY: XXX Km/h)This display will show the speed limit or the advisedspeed as determined by the information on the map discin the navigation system. If there is no map disc in thenavigation system, this display will not be available.

The speed limit and speed advisory displays on theDIC are for reference only. There may be segments ofroad where speed data has not been captured or timeswhere incorrect speed data, or no speed data, will bedisplayed by the DIC due to the navigation system notcorrectly matching the vehicle’s position to the actualroad. Be aware of this and obey posted speed limitswherever you drive.

SPEED ALERTThis display will allow you to customize the speed alertwarning. You can choose to have no warning display,or to have it display at the limit, at 5 mph (km/h) overthe limit, or at 10 mph (km/h) over the limit. The DICwill toggle between OFF, AT LIMIT, +5, +10 (MPH orKm/h). Press the reset button to make your selection.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedurewill erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,they must be relearned as additional transmitters.To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:1. Press the vehicle information button until

PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY

LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on

the first transmitter at the same time for about15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter ismatched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeatStep 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum of eighttransmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle thekey to LOCK/OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

3-72

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problem detectedin one of your vehicle’s systems.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it from thescreen for further use. To clear a message, pressthe set/reset button.

Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearing themessage will only make the message disappear,not the problem.

ADVISORY XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when the Speed Alert has beenturned on through the DIC Information Menu and thevehicle is at or above the advised speed. See DICOperation and Displays on page 3-68.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automatic headlampsare turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 formore information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automatic headlampsare turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-29 formore information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detects thatthe battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonablelevel. The battery saver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.At the point that the features are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the batteryto recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button untilBATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is required foryour vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oilon page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you still mustreset the engine oil life system separately. For moreinformation on resetting the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.

3-73

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREOn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure inone or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate whichtire needs to be checked. You can receive more thanone tire pressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have thetire pressures checked and set to those shown on theTire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 5-48,Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-57. The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-68. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressurewarning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 3-60.

CLEAN RADARThis message displays when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) system and the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system are disabled becausethe radar is blocked and cannot detect vehicles inyour path. It may also activate during heavy rain ordue to road spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaningthe System” under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.

CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays whenever the cruise control isset. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.

If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), aftera few seconds, this message clears and the message“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This symbol appears withthis message.

This message displays when the driver door is notclosed completely. Make sure that the door is closedcompletely.

3-74

ENGINE HOT – A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-60.To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperature returns to normal,the air conditioning compressor turns back on.You can continue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have the systemrepaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possibleto avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engineis overheating, severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-28 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 3-59.

See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-30 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engineis overheating, severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28for more information.

This message displays when the engine has overheated.Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicleover and turn the engine off right away to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating on page 5-28and Overheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 5-30. A chime also sounds when this messageis displayed.

3-75

ENGINE POWER REDUCEDThis message displays when the engine power is beingreduced to protect the engine from damage. There couldbe several malfunctions that might cause this message.Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s abilityto accelerate. If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer forservice as soon as possible.

FOLLOWING GAP

This symbol appears with this message.

If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), thismessage displays to show the follow distance that hasbeen set. There are six follow distances to choose from.Each follow distance is shown on the DIC by displayingfrom one to six bars between two car symbols.See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19 formore information.

FUEL LEVEL LOW


This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single chimesounds when this message is displayed. See Filling theTank on page 5-7.

3-76

HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFFThis message displays when you manually turn offthe heated washer fluid system or when the systemautomatically turns off. See “Heated Washer Fluid”under Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for moreinformation.

HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUIDWASH (Washer) WIPES PENDINGThis message displays when you turn on the heatedwasher fluid system. See “Heated Washer Fluid” underWindshield Washer on page 3-15 for more information.

HOOD OPEN


This message displays when the hood is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the hood is closedcompletely. See Hood Release on page 5-11.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside temperatureis cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLEIf your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system, this message may display if the LDW systemdoes not activate due to a temporary condition.See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 2-49for more information.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the driver side rear dooris not closed completely. Make sure that the dooris closed completely.

3-77

NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDALAPPLIEDThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing theaccelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automaticbraking. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engineoil pressure is low, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressure warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument panel cluster. See Oil PressureLight on page 3-64.

A multiple chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for moreinformation.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage canresult from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer assoon as possible when this message is displayed.

PARKING ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park), this message displays to remindthe driver that the UFRPA system has been turned off.Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display. To turn the UFRPAsystem back on, see “PARKING ASSIST” under DICOperation and Displays on page 3-68. See UltrasonicFront and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 2-42for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the passenger side frontdoor is not closed completely. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

3-78

RADAR CRUISE NOT READYThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) system will not activate due to atemporary condition. Your vehicle does not requireservice. If this message appears when you attempt toactivate the system, continue driving for several minutesand then try activating the system again. See AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.

RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this messagedisplays while this feature is active. See Rainsense™II Wipers on page 3-14 for more information.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 2-5 and DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-68 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-5.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN


This message displays when the passenger side reardoor is not closed completely. Make sure that the door isclosed completely.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-54 for more information.

3-79

SERVICE A/C SYSTEMThis message displays when the air delivery mode dooror the electronic sensors that control the air conditioningand heating systems are no longer working. Have theclimate control system serviced by your dealer/retailerif you notice a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with thecharging system has been detected. The chargingsystem light also displays on the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-56for more information. Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message displays if there is a problem with thebrake system. The brake system warning light andthe antilock brake system warning light may also bedisplayed on the instrument panel cluster. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-56 and Antilock Brake

System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-57 for moreinformation. If this happens, stop as soon as possible andturn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. If the message is displayedor appears again when you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soonas possible. See Brakes on page 5-33 for moreinformation.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays if the ignition is on to inform thedriver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brakesystem serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system, this message may display to indicate that theLDW system is not working properly. If this messageremains on after continued driving, the system needsservice. See your dealer/retailer. See Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) on page 2-49 for more information.

3-80

SERVICE PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and RearParking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message displaysif there is a problem with the UFRPA system. Do notuse this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Frontand Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 2-42 formore information. See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGYour vehicle may have a speed variable assist steeringsystem. See Steering on page 4-8.

This message displays if a problem is detected withthe speed variable assist steering system. When thismessage is displayed, you may notice that the effortrequired to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISEThis message displays when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) system and the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system and this message displays, both SBZA displayswill remain on indicating there is a problem with theSBZA system. If these displays remain on after continueddriving, the system needs service. See your dealer/retailer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45for more information.

SERVICE STABILITRAKYour vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancementsystem called StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-6.

This message displays if there has been a problemdetected with the StabiliTrak system.

If this message comes on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off thenback on. If this message still stays on or comes back onagain while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

3-81

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)This message displays when the magnetic ridecontrol or automatic leveling control system is notoperating properly. Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problem withthe theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A faulthas been detected in the system which means that thesystem is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want totake the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning offthe engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-23 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMOn vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMSis not working properly. The tire pressure lightalso flashes and then remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-60.Several conditions may cause this message to appear.See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-61 formore information. If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with the TPMS, see yourdealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when there is a problem with theTraction Control System (TCS). When this message isdisplayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for moreinformation.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problem with thevehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissions relatedmalfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SET SPD (Speed)If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),this message displays whenever the cruise control isset. First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”message appears. After a few seconds, the “CRUISESET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message clears and themessage “SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of theDIC. See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” earlier inthis section and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19for more information.

3-82

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFFIf your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system, this message displays when the SBZA systemhas been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 2-45 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-68for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLEIf your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system, this message displays when the SBZA system isdisabled because the sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may beblocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This messagemay also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.It may also come on when driving in isolated areas withno guardrails, trees, or road signs and light traffic. Yourvehicle does not need service. For cleaning instructions,see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90. See Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-45 for more information.

SPEED LIMIT XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when the Speed Alert has beenturned on through the DIC Information Menu and thevehicle is at or above the speed limit. See DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-68 for more information.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when your vehicle speedis limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling controlsystems. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

STABILITRAK NOT READYIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message maydisplay and the Traction Control System and StabiliTrakWarning Light on the instrument panel cluster maybe on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTraksystem is not functional until the light has turned off.See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for moreinformation.

3-83

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED


This message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-21 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message displays when the fuel cap has not beenfully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that itis on and tightened properly.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65,Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-6 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.

3-84

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could leadto costly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warning is displayed.

This message displays when the transmission fluidin your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow itto idle until the transmission cools down or until thismessage is removed.

TRUNK OPEN


This message displays when the trunk is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn off theturn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chimesounds when this message is displayed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID


This message displays when your vehicle is low onwindshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washerfluid reservoir as soon as possible. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-32 for more information.

3-85

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features to one preferred setting.Customization features can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmedto a preferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not be available onyour vehicle. Only the options available will be displayedon the DIC.

The default settings for the customization features wereset when your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

P (Park).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter the featuresettings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before enteringthe menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allow youto program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language other thanEnglish has been set. This feature allows you to changethe language in which the DIC messages appear toEnglish.

Press the customization button until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button once to display allDIC messages in English.

3-86

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language in whichthe DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.

JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.

ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while thedesired setting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when the vehicle’sdoors will automatically lock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this feature. Then pressthe menu up/down button to scroll through the followingsettings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doorsautomatically lock when the doors are closed andthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically lockwhen the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)for three seconds.



3-87

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It alsoallows you to select which doors and when the doorswill automatically unlock. See Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-11 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlockwhen the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlockwhen the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type of feedbackyou will receive when locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will notreceive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter if the doors are open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second pressof the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock buttonis pressed again within five seconds of the previouscommand.


3-88


REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type of feedbackyou will receive when unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will notreceive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter if the doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash whenyou press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed.When locking the doors with the power door lock switchand a door is open, this feature will delay locking thedoors until five seconds after the last door is closed.You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use. The key must be out of theignition for this feature to work. You can temporarilyoverride delayed locking by pressing the power doorlock switch twice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’sdoors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock until five secondsafter the last door is closed.



3-89

EXIT LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select the amount of time youwant the exterior lamps to remain on when it is darkenough outside. This happens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this feature. Then pressthe menu up/down button to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay onfor 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicle using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exteriorlights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle isno longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-5 for more information.



3-90

CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume level of thechime.

Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this feature. Then pressthe menu up/down button to scroll through the followingsettings:

NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normallevel.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.


There is no default for chime volume. The volume willstay at the last known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to selectwhether or not the outside mirror(s) will automaticallytilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-41 for more information.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outsidemirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shiftedinto R (Reverse).



3-91

EASY EXIT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to selectyour preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel onpage 1-6 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITRECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recallwill occur. The recall will only occur after pressingthe easy exit seat button.

BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features areenabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, thedriver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has thepower tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, thepower steering column will move up and forward whenthe key is removed from the ignition or after pressingthe easy exit seat button.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occurone time after the key is removed from the ignition.If the automatic movement has already occurred, andyou put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,the seat and steering column will stay in the originalexit position, unless a memory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



EASY EXIT SETUPIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to selectwhich areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seatfeature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easyexit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 1-6 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlierfor more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUPappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this feature. Then pressthe menu up/down button to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.

SEAT ONLY: The driver’s seat will recall.

TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.

TELESCOPE ONLY: The steering column telescopefeature will recall.

3-92

SEAT/TILT: The driver’s seat and the steering wheel tiltfeature will recall.

SEAT/TELESCOPE: The driver’s seat and the steeringcolumn telescope feature will recall.

TILT/TELESCOPE: The steering wheel tilt and steeringcolumn telescope features will recall.

ALL (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheeltilt and steering column telescope features will recall,if your vehicle has this option.



MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to selectyour preference for the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 1-6 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORY SEATRECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scroll throughthe following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall willoccur.

ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors willautomatically move to the stored driving position whenthe unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed. The steering column will alsomove on vehicles with the power tilt and telescopicsteering feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column on page 3-7 for more information.See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-68 for more information onmatching transmitters to driver ID numbers.



3-93

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn theremote start off or on. The remote start feature allows youto start the engine from outside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-7 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTE STARTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for this feature. Then pressthe menu up/down button to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.


FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of the customizationfeatures back to their factory default settings.Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customization featureswill be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features willnot be set to their factory default settings.To select a setting, press the set/reset button while thedesired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when any ofthe following occurs:• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons arepressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu is reachedand exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

3-94

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehicle has and read thefollowing pages to become familiar with its features.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others. Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and nonaudio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,do the following while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with the operation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and presetradio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment couldinterfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and could damage them.Follow federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).With RAP, the audio system can be played even afterthe ignition is turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 2-26 for more information.

3-95

Setting the Clock

Radio with a Single CD or aSix-Disc CD PlayerThe vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digitalradio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the digitalradio clock display should be disabled. If you decide touse the digital radio clock as well as the analog clock, youcan change the setting to enable the radio clock display.

Enabling/Disabling the DigitalRadio Clock

For the Single CD PlayerTo turn the radio clock display on or off:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the H button until the clock and date settingmenus appear.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the forwardarrow tab until the menu for default clock anddate settings appear.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the currentlydisplayed status of either ON or OFF. The ONdisplay indicates the radio clock display is disabledand the OFF display indicates the radio clock displayis enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radioclock display on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, the screendisplays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, thenreturns to the original clock display menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.The menus for clock and date settings are removed,and ON displays as a current status indicating thatthe clock display can be turned on, if desired.

The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.Occasionally you might need to set the digital radioclock using the procedure below to synchronizeboth clocks.

3-96

For a Six-Disc CD PlayerTo turn the radio clock display on or off:


2. Press the MENU button until H is displayed

3. Press the pushbutton located under H until theclock and date settings appear.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the forwardarrow tab until the menu for default clock anddate settings appear.

5. Press the pushbutton located under the currentlydisplayed status of either ON or OFF. The ONdisplay indicates the radio clock display is disabledand the OFF display indicates the radio clock displayis enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radioclock display on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, the screendisplays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, thenreturns to the original clock display menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.The menus for clock and date settings are removed,and ON displays as a current status indicating thatthe clock display can be turned on, if desired.

Setting the Time and DateFor the Single CD Player

This type of radio has a H button for setting the timeand date. To set the time and date:


2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any one ofthe tabs that you want to change. Every time thepushbutton is pressed again, the time or the dateif selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, is topress the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWDbutton.

• To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEKarrow or the s REV button. You can also turnthe a knob, located on the upper right side of theradio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting.

3-97

For a Six-Disc CD PlayerThis type of radio has a MENU button for setting thetime and date. To set the time and date:


2. Press the MENU button until H option is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under H and theHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any one ofthe tabs that you want to change. Every time thepushbutton is pressed again, the time or the dateif selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, is topress the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWDbutton.

• To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEKarrow or the s REV button. You can also turnthe a knob, located on the upper right side of theradio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSetting

For the Single CD PlayerTo change the time and date default setting:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing the H button.

2. Once the clock and date settings display along withthe forward arrow tab, press the pushbutton locatedunder the forward arrow tab until the time 12H and24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption, then press the H button again to applythe selected default, or let the screen time out.

3-98

For the Six-Disc CD PlayerTo change the time and date default setting:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENUbutton.

2. Once H displays, press the pushbutton locatedunder H until the time and date settings displayalong with a forward arrow.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the forwardarrow tab until the time 12H and 24H, and thedate MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) andDD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption, then press the MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

Radio(s) (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has RDS. The RDS feature isavailable for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD similar

3-99

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system onand off.

Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radioswith SCV automatically adjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and wind noise while driving.That way, the volume level should sound aboutthe same while driving. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radio volumecompensation. The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

AudioPilot®: If the vehicle has the Bose® audiosystem, it has AudioPilot noise compensation technology.

To use AudioPilot:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.


3. Press the pushbutton located under theAUTO VOLUM tab on the radio display.

4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this featureon or off.

When turned ON, AudioPilot continuously adjuststhe audio system equalization, to compensate forbackground noise, so that the music always soundsthe same at the set volume level.

The feature is most effective at lower radio volumesettings where background noise can affect how wellyou hear the music being played through the vehicle’saudio system. At high volume settings there mightbe little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For moreinformation on AudioPilot, visit bose.com/audiopilot.

3-100

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.The selection displays.

a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the next or tothe previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow forthree seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goesto a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press this button todisplay additional text information related to the currentFM-RDS or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist,CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, or pressthe pushbutton positioned under any one of the tabs andthe information about that tab displays.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has thisfeature. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio station frequency tabs andby using the radio favorites page button. Press theFAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain any combination ofAM, FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the page whereyou want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until abeep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio stationyou want stored as a favorite.

3-101

The number of favorites pages can be setup using theMENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,to return to the original main radio screen showingthe radio station frequency labels and to beginthe process of programming your favorites forthe chosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knobuntil the tone control labels display. Continue pressingto highlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn the a knobto adjust the highlighted setting. The highlightedsetting can also be adjusted by pressing eitherSEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until thedesired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequencyis weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press the a knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

3-102

EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified radio,perform the following steps to setup the equalizationsettings:

1. Press the a knob until the equalization labeldisplays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalizationlabel to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY (country),TALK, JAZZ, and CLAS (classical), to display.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the desiredsetting.

For the Bose amplified radio, perform the followingsteps to setup the equalization settings:

1. Press the a knob until the DSP label displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP labelto get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and Surround,to display.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the desiredsetting.To select Surround, press either the fourth or fifthpushbutton located under the displayed Surrounduntil Centerpoint displays.

To return to the manual mode, press the tune knob.Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start to manuallyadjust the settings by turning the a knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,press the a knob until the speaker control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or pressthe pushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the a knob to adjust the highlighted setting.The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressingeither SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV buttonsuntil the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADElabel for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to themiddle position, press the a knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

3-103

Digital Signal Processing (DSP)This feature is used to provide a choice of four differentlistening experiences. DSP can be used while listening tothe audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode,press the a knob until the DSP control label displays.Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label untilthe control labels display. Continue by pressing thedesired button below the control labels on the display.For more information on the control label displays,see the following:• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust

the audio for normal mode. This provides the bestsound quality for all seating positions.

• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjustthe audio for the driver to receive the bestpossible sound quality.

• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audiofor the rear seat passengers to receive the bestpossible sound quality.

• Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen buttonto enable Bose® Centerpoint signal processingcircuitry. Centerpoint produces a full vehicle surroundsound listening experience from a CD, MP3/WMA,or XM stereo digital audio source and delivers fiveindependent audio channels from conventional twochannel stereo recordings. (Not available for AM,FM, or auxiliary sources.)

DSP is only available on vehicles that have the BosePremium audio system.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XMstations while the radio is in the XM mode. To findXM channels within a desired category, performthe following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequencydisplays. Press the CAT button to display thecategory tabs. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays. Anotherway to select a category is to press the s REVor \ FWD button until the desired category isselected.

2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below thedesired category tab to immediately tune to thefirst XM station associated with that category.

3. Turn the a knob, press the pushbuttons below thedisplayed right or left arrows, or press either SEEKarrow to go to the previous or the next XM stationwithin the selected category.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

3-104

Undesired XM categories can be removed through thesetup menu. To remove an undesired category:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT tab.

3. Turn the a knob to display the category to beremoved.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the Removetab until the category name along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Restore All label.

The radio does not let you remove or add categorieswhile the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The CAT button also toggles between compressedand uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.

Radio Message

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM RadioOnline for when you are not in the vehicle. A servicefee is required to receive the XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM at xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca orcall 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-115 later in thissection for further detail.

3-105

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play the track numberdisplays.

Care of CDsIf playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)in their original cases or other protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, theCD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch thebottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damagethe surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint freecloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Care of The CD PlayerDo not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computerand a description label is needed, try labeling the topof the recorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,the CD player could be damaged. While using the CDplayer, use only CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

3-106

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.The CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button for five seconds.A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insertthe discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD. If the CD is notremoved, after several seconds, the CD automaticallypulls back into the player.

For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, press and holdfor two seconds to eject all discs, if one or morediscs are loaded.

a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currentlyplaying.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than ten seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly within a track. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. Release to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD trackscan be played in random, rather than sequentialorder. This feature is not available in playlist mode.To use random, do the following:

1. To play tracks in random order from the CD that iscurrently playing, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label. The random icon displays.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off randomplay. The random icon is no longer highlighted.

3-107

RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):With the random setting, CD tracks can be playedin random, rather than sequential order, on one CDor all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use random:• Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab

until Randomize Current Disc displays to play thetracks in random order from the CD that is currentlyplaying. Press again to turn off random play.

• Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tabuntil Randomize All Discs displays to play tracksfrom all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player inrandom order. Press again to turn off random play.

4 (Information): Press to switch the display betweenthe track number, elapsed time of the track, and thetime. When the ignition is off, press to display the time(if the clock display is enabled). See “Enabling/Disablingthe Digital Radio Clock” under, Setting the Clock onpage 3-96 for more information.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD isplaying. The CD remains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. The CD icon and track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press again andthe system automatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, “No Aux Input DeviceFound” displays.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscRadios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing anMP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,see Using an MP3 on page 3-110 later in this section.

CD Messages

DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the CDejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• The radio system does not support the playlistformat, the compressed audio format, or the datafile format.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

3-108

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provideit to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jack locatedon the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not anaudio output; do not plug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. You can however, connectan external audio device such as an iPod™, laptopcomputer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tapeplayer, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving onpage 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When connecting an auxiliary device, the radio

automatically detects the device and “Aux Input Device”displays. The device begins playing audio over thevehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already beenconnected, the device does not begin playing audio untilthe radio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need to doadditional volume adjustments from the portable device.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portableaudio device is playing. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you might want to stop it orpower it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when aportable audio device is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.

3-109

Using an MP3

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded withthe following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbpsor a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumcan display when files are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMAfiles. By default the radio reads only the uncompressedaudio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing theCAT button toggles between compressed anduncompressed audio format.

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to findsongs while driving. Organize songs by albumsusing one folder for each album. Each folderor album should contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total numberof folders to a minimum in order to reduce thecomplexity and confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension(other file extensions might not work).

3-110

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files and folders,or playlists can cause the player to be unable to playup to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions. If you wish to play a large number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize thelength of the file, folder, or playlist name. Longnames also take up more space on the display,potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying toadd music to an existing disc can cause the disc notto function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by using the Sc andcT folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recordedusing no file folders can also be played. If a CD-R orCD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you accessand navigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated asa folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are alwaysaccessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfoldersand no compressed files directly beneath them, theplayer advances to the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audio files. The empty folderdoes not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, the filesare located under the root folder. The next and previousfolder functions do not display on a CD that was recordedwithout folders or playlists. When displaying the name ofthe folder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists and compressedaudio files, but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. The folder down and the folder up buttonssearch playlists (Px) first and then goes to the rootfolder. When the radio displays the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

3-111

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlistand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

− Playlists can be changed by pressingthe Sc and cT folder buttons,the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.

• Play begins from the first track in the first folder andcontinues sequentially through all tracks in eachfolder. When the last track of the last folder hasplayed, play continues from the first track of thefirst folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the default display.The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. Parts of words on the last page oftext and the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ softwarecan be accessed, however, they cannot be editedusing the radio. These playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files. Playlistsmust have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.

Playlists can be changed by using the Sc andcT folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are playedsequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to reverseor advance through the currently playing song.

3-112

Playing an MP3/WMAInsert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (SingleCD Player), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label sideup. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW shouldbegin playing.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) orCD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can beremoved. If it is not removed, after several seconds,the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into theplayer and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button fortwo seconds to eject all discs.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files onthe CD-R currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to goto the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is heldor pressed multiple times, the player continues movingbackward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder tab to go to the first trackin the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positionedunder the Folder tab to go to the first track in the nextfolder.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advanceplayback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

3-113

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or alldiscs in a six-disc CD player. To use random:

1. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Random Current Disc displays to playMP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in randomorder. Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

2. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays to playsongs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD playerin random order. Press the same pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RWin order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It may take several minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded tothe CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin playing whileit is scanning the disc in the background. When the scanis finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line of the displaybetween the arrows. Once all songs by that artist haveplayed, the player moves to the next artist in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to listen toMP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes to thenext or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either button until the desired artist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback by album,press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below thealbum button. Press the pushbutton below the Back labelto return to the main music navigator screen. Now thealbum name displays on the second line between thearrows and songs from the current album begins to play.Once all songs from that album have played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order on theCD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the button below theBack label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.

3-114

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD isplaying. The inactive CD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. The CD icon and a messageshowing disc and/or track number displays when aCD is in the player. Press this button again andthe system automatically searches for an auxiliaryinput device such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device Found” displays.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver isbeing updated, and no action is required. This processshould take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action is needed.This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently inservice. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot bereceived with your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel isno longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this stationwas one of the presets, choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Artist Info: No artist information is available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Title Info: No song title information is availableat this time on this channel. The system is workingproperly.

No CAT Info: No category information is available atthis time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Information: No text or informational messages areavailable at this time on this channel. The system isworking properly.

3-115

CAT Not Found: There are no channels available forthe selected category. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle couldhave previously been in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped betweenvehicles. If this message is received after having thevehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this messagealternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned tochannel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consultwith your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could havea fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could havea fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Navigation/Radio SystemFor vehicles with a navigation radio system, see theseparate Navigation System manual.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetoothcapable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to makeand receive phone calls. The system can be used whilethe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and notall phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpretvoice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.The system may not recognize voice commands ifthere is too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the systemresponds indicating when it is waiting for a voicecommand. Wait until the tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and naturalvoice.

3-116

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, soundcomes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakersand overrides the audio system. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.The adjusted volume level remains in memory for latercalls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume levelis used if the volume is turned down too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on the steering wheel tooperate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See AudioSteering Wheel Controls on page 3-127 for moreinformation.

bg (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,to confirm system information, and to start speechrecognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject acall, or to cancel an operation.

PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired tothe in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connectedto the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is notconnected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide formore information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle ismoving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically linkswith the first available paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to thein-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to be completed once,unless changes to the pairing information havebeen made or the phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to aDifferent Phone later in this section.

3-117

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructionsand a four digit PIN number. The PIN number willbe used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that willbe paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phonemanufacturers user guide for information onthis process.Locate the device named “General Motors” in thelist on the cellular phone and follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a name for the phone.Use a name that best describes the phone.This name will be used to indicate which phoneis connected. The system then confirms the nameprovided.

6. The system responds with “<Phone name> hasbeen successfully paired” after the pairing processis complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones tobe paired.

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

1. Press and hold bg for two seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followed by a tone.


3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetoothdevices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, thesystem will say “Is connected” after the connectedphone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone todelete followed by a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If thephone name is unknown, use the “List” commandfor a list of all paired phones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete <phone name>?Yes or No” followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.

3-118

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with“Please wait while I search for other phones”.

• If another phone is found, the response will be“<Phone name> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirty phone numbers asname tags that are shared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The system uses the following commands to store andretrieve phone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory

Using the Store CommandThe store command allows a phone number to bestored without entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,number please” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone number to be stored atonce with no pauses.

• If the system recognizes the number it respondswith “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phonenumber, it responds with “Store” and repeats thenumber followed by “Please say yes or no”. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The system will ask for thenumber to be re-entered.

3-119

4. After the system stores the phone number, itresponds with “Please say the name tag” followedby a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store CommandThe digit store command allows a phone number to bestored by entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with“Please say the first digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system willrepeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until the number to bestored is complete.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

4. After the complete number has been entered, say“Store”. The system responds with “Please say thename tag” followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The nametag is recorded and the system responds with“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not sound correct, say“No” and repeat Step 5.

• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” andthe name tag is stored. After the number isstored the system returns to the main menu.

3-120

Using the Directory CommandThe directory command lists all of the name tags storedby the system. To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with“Directory” and then plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the following commands to deletename tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete CommandThe delete command allows specific name tags to bedeleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,please say the name tag” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The systemresponds with “Would you like to delete,<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to deletethe name tag. The system responds with “OK,deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please saythe name tag.”

Using the Delete All Name Tags CommandThe delete all name tags command deletes all storedphone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar(if present).

To use the delete all name tags command:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system respondswith “You are about to delete all name tags storedin your phone directory and your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you want to do this? Pleasesay yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to themain menu.

3-121

Making a CallCalls can be made using the following commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.

3. Say the entire number without pausing.

• If the system recognizes the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If the system does not recognize the number,it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for the number to bere-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed by a tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Followingeach digit, the system will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

4. Continue entering digits until the number to bedialed is complete. After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. The system respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted number is recognized by thesystem, say “Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

• To hear all of the numbers recognized by thesystem, say “Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followedby a tone.

3-122

3. Say the name tag of the person to call.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number.

• If the system is unsure it recognizes the rightname tag, it confirms the name tag followed bya tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. Thesystem responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”and dials the number. If the name tag is notcorrect, say “No”. The system will ask for thename tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system respondswith “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials thelast number called from the connected Bluetoothphone.

Once connected, the person called will be heardthrough the audio speakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received, the audio systemmutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.

• Press c x to ignore a call.

Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.

• Press b g to answer an incoming call whenanother call is active. The original call is placedon hold.

• Press b g again to return to the original call.

• To ignore the incoming call, continue with theoriginal call with no action.

• Press c x to disconnect the current call andswitch to the call on hold.

3-123

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press b g . The system respondswith “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number ofthe third party to be called.

4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link allthe callers together.

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle canbe muted so that the person on the other end of thecall cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with“Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Resuming call”.

Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred between the in-vehicleBluetooth system and the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell PhoneDuring a call with the audio in the vehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with“Transferring call” and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

3-124

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth SystemThe cellular phone must be paired and connected withthe Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.The connection process can take up to two minutes afterthe key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition.

During a call with the audio on the cell phone,press b g for more than two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognitioncommands on the cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see if the cell phonesupports this feature. This feature can be used toverbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.



3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with“OK, accessing <phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages willgo through its cycle according to the phone’soperating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers andnumbers stored as name tags during a call. This is usedwhen calling a menu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can be programmed into the phonebook forretrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say anumber to send tones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized thenumber properly, it responds “Dial Number,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

3-125

Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call

1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

• If the system is not sure it recognized thename tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent and the call continues.

Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted out of the in-vehicleBluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags in the phonebookand phone pairing information. For information onhow to delete this information, see the above sectionson Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by theBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license. Other trademarksand trade names are those of their respective owners.








3-126

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of thevehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). The radio does not operateif it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsVehicles with audiosteering wheel controlscould differ dependingon the vehicle’s options.Some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station storedas a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.

cx(Previous/End): Press to go to the previousradio station stored as a favorite, the next track if aCD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or enda current call.

bg (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems pressand hold for longer than two seconds to interact withthose systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-51and Bluetooth® on page 3-116 in this manual for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio(AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigation system, press and holdthis button for longer than two seconds to initiate voicerecognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for more information.

+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decreasethe radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station whilein AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Pressthe ¨if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next discwhile sourced to a CD player.

3-127

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can cause stationfrequencies to interfere with each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduce these levels during thenight. Static can also occur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radio reception. When thishappens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio receptionfrom coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound tofade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with thevehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when makingor receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on. This interference causesan increased level of static while listening to the radio.If static is received while listening to the radio, unplugthe cellular phone and turn it off.

3-128

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window is notscratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. For proper radio reception,the antenna connector needs to be properly attachedto the post on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached tothe glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FMantenna are not damaged. There is enough spacebetween the grid lines to attach a cellular telephoneantenna without interfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window can damage the rear windowantenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do notclear the inside rear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof ofthe vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XMsystem may be affected if the sunroof is open.

3-129

✍ NOTES

3-130

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-3Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6Magnetic Ride Control™ ..................................4-8Steering ........................................................4-8Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-10Passing .......................................................4-10Loss of Control .............................................4-10

Driving at Night ............................................4-12Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-12Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-14Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-14Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-15Winter Driving ..............................................4-16If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .............................................4-18Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-19Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-19

Towing ..........................................................4-26Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-26Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-26Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andthe Vehicle

Driving for Better Fuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are somedriving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive moreslowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

• Combine several trips into a single trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Specnumber molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-12.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance between youand the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting ininjury or possible death. These simple defensivedriving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Yourreflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annualmotor vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control the vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires and road canprovide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

4-3

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-56.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it iswet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is amistake. The brakes might not have time to cool betweenhard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a

lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic andallowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakesare pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.If the engine stops, there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Oncethe power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), anadvanced electronic braking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the engine is started and the vehicle begins todrive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motoror clicking noise might be heard while this test is goingon, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

4-4

If there is a problem withABS, this warning lightstays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS)Warning Light onpage 3-57.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, asrequired, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to geta foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stoppingdistance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump ormotor operating might be heard and the brake pedalmight be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help more thaneven the very best braking.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed toassist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speedin emergency driving conditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brake control module tosupplement the power brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly and forcefully appliedthe brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stability system hydraulicbrake control module increases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minorbrake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during thistime is normal and the driver should continue toapply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictatesThe Brake Assist feature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released or brake pedalpressure is quickly decreased.

4-5

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system whichcombines antilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directional controlof the vehicle in most driving conditions. This isaccomplished by selectively applying any one of thevehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.

The StabiliTrak system comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. The system cannot beturned off.

This light will flash whenthe system is operating.

The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and theTraction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warninglight on the instrument panel cluster comes on after firstdriving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until thelight has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash when the system is operating.See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 3-58 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light onpage 3-58 for more information. The system may beheard or felt while it is working. This is normal.

The SERVICE STABILITRAK message is displayed andthe TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument panelcluster comes on if there is a problem with the system.When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAKmessage are on, the system is not working. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

Traction Control System (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinning too much or beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the system worksthe front brakes and reduces engine power (by closingthe throttle and managing engine spark) to limitwheel spin.

4-6

The TCS and StabiliTrak®

light will flash when thesystem is limitingwheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal. See Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 3-58 for more information.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged whenroad conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-16.

The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message inthe DIC and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes onif there is a problem with the traction control system.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-73.

When this light and the SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL message are on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To turn the system off oron, press and release thisbutton located in frontof the shift lever.

TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To limit wheel spin, especially in slipperyroad conditions, always leave the system turned on.TCS can be turned off if needed.

The system can be turned on or off at any time bypressing the TCS button. The DIC will displayTRACTION CONTROL OFF when the button is pressed,and part of the traction control system is disabled.The vehicle will still have brake-traction control, but willnot be able to use the engine speed managementsystem. System noises may be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control working. If the controller detectsexcessive wheel spin in this mode, the TCS/StabiliTraklight may blink.

It is recommended to leave the system on for normaldriving conditions, but it may be necessary to turnthe system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt tofree it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 4-18.

4-7

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Magnetic Ride Control™The vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control thatautomatically adjusts the ride of the vehicle.The controller receives input from the system todetermine the proper ride. If the controller detects aproblem within the system, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSmessage. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-73 for more information. If this message appears,have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer.

Electronically Controlled Air RideSuspensionProfessional Vehicles may have Electronically ControlledAir Suspension. The air ride controller receives inputfrom the system to determine the proper ride. If thecontroller detects a problem with the system, the DICwill display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.If this message appears, have the vehicle servicedat your dealer/retailer.

Steering

Power SteeringIf power steering assist is lost because the engine stopsor the system is not functioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable AssistSteering SystemThis system continuously adjusts the effort felt whensteering at all vehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tiresand the road surface, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before enteringthe curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

4-8

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Theseproblems can be avoided by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot stop in timebecause there is no room. That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.It is better to remove as much speed as possiblefrom a collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turneda full 180 degrees very quickly without removingeither hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, andjust as quickly straighten the wheel once you haveavoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-9

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of aroad onto the shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass.If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-10

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, the wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If the traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easingyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, the system may beactive. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slowdown and adjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try yourbest to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-11

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day drivingbecause some drivers are likely to be impaired — byalcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or byfatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because headlamps can only light upso much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, aswe get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-olddriver might need at least twice as much light to see thesame thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these types of drivingconditions and avoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.

4-12

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or acar/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.Driving through flowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If this happens, youand other vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be very cautious abouttrying to drive through flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:• Allow extra following distance.• Pass with caution.• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires

on page 5-48.• Turn off cruise control.

4-13

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-14

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get sohot that they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignitionoff is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and they could get so hotthat they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-15

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerategently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quicklycauses the wheels to spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is even less traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,but slow down and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. When driving through deep snow, turn offthe traction control system to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4 improvesvehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,but apply the brakes sooner than when on drypavement.

Allow greater following distance on any slippery roadand watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur onotherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surfaceof a curve or an overpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Staywith the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,use the Roadside Service on page 7-7. To get help andkeep everyone in the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.

• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

4-16

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from around the base of

your vehicle, especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.

• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) onthe side of the vehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on or under theinstrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Control system to a settingthat circulates the air inside the vehicle andset the fan speed to the highest setting.See Climate Control System in the Index.



For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-36.Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not knowit is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keepwarm, but be careful.To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods asneeded to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine offand close the window most of the way to save heat.Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then whenyou run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly sothe engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps thebattery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible tosave fuel.

4-17

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free thevehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-19.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction system offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other damage. Spinthe wheels as little as possible and avoid goingabove 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-73.

4-18

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutTurn the steering wheel left and right to clear thearea around the front wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. To prevent transmission wear, waituntil the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmissionis in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward andreverse directions causes a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out aftera few tries, it might need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 4-26.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

4-19

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 5-48 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire andLoading Information label specific to your vehiclewill be provided and installed by the final bodymanufacturer. The Tire and Loading Informationlabel, should be attached to the B-pillar ofyour vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’smanual or contact them directly. The labelshows the original tires installed on yourprofessional vehicle and the recommended coldtire inflation pressures for those tires. The labelalso tells you the professional vehicle’s capacityweight.

Label Example

4-20

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing aTrailer” for important information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

4-21

Item Description Total

AVehicle CapacityWeight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-22



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1,000 lbs(453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. This labelshows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the frontor rear axle.

Example 3

4-23

If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehiclespecific Certification label is provided by the finalstage manufacturer. The coach-builder should beconsulted if the final stage manufacturer’s label isnot present. The Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGVWR label should be on the driver’s door edge.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread itout. See “Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-24

If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will goas fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keepgoing.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward as youcan. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so that someof them are above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Automatic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle levelas the load changes. It is automatic, you donot need to adjust anything.

This type of level control is fully automatic and willprovide a better leveled riding position as wellas better handling under a variety of passengerand loading conditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height)for up to ten minutes after the ignition keyhas been turned to LOCK/OFF. You may hear theair compressor operating when the height isbeing adjusted.

4-25

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Service on page 7-7.

To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle forrecreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing the vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehiclewith two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things to consider beforerecreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicleshave restrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Does the vehicle have the proper towingequipment? See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparingthe vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on aLong Trip on page 4-14.

4-26

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with allfour wheels on the ground. Use a dolly if the vehiclemust be towed. See “Dolly Towing” later in this sectionfor more information.

Dolly Towing

The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow thevehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).3. Set the parking brake.4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead

position with a clamping device designed for towing.5. Remove the key from the ignition.6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.7. Release the parking brake.

4-27

Towing a TrailerThe Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.

{CAUTION:

The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer ifthe correct equipment is not used or the vehicle isnot driven properly. For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes may not work well — oreven at all. The driver and passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer onlyif all the steps in this section have been followed.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with the vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage thevehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section and see yourdealer/retailer for important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify the traileringcapacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weightof the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of theseare important for the safety of the driver and thepassengers. So please read this section carefully beforepulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greater loads, generating extraheat. The trailer also adds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

4-28

Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make surethe rig will be legal, not only where you live butalso where you will be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,transmission or other parts could be damaged.The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’swarranty.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that atrailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at full throttle. This helpsthe engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmissionto a lower gear if the transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Do not drive faster than the maximum postedspeed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature isabove 100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,altitude, road grades, outside temperature and howmuch the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are allimportant. It can depend on any special equipment onthe vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehiclecan carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later inthis section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only thedriver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehiclemust be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information oradvice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 formore information.

4-29

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total gross weightof the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargocarried in it, and the people who will be riding in thevehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing atrailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVWbecause the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19 for moreinformation about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then thetongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.If they are not, adjustments might be made by movingsome items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. These numbers can be found on theCertification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-19. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit forthe vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-30

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended forhitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehiclewhen the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, thenbe sure to seal the holes later when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaustcan get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-36 for more information.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between the vehicle and thetrailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting theroad if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safetychains and do not attach them to the bumper. Alwaysleave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesBecause the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not tap intothe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintainedproperly.

4-31

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mindthat the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This checks the electrical connectionat the same time.

During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakesare still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. Thiscan help to avoid situations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.

PassingMore passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehicle before returningto the lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

4-32

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on the instrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers thevehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panelflash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burnedout. For this reason you may think other drivers areseeing the signal when they are not. It is important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on GradesNotice: Do not tow on steep continuous gradesexceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher thannormal engine and transmission temperaturesmay result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stopsare very important to allow the engine andtransmission to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before startingdown a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission isnot shifted down, the brakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and no longer work well.On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce thevehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating. If the engine does overheat, see EngineOverheating on page 5-28.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailerattached can be dangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move. People can beinjured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, always park the rig ona flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhillor into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release thebrake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parkingbrake and shift the transmission into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

4-33

Leaving After Parking on a Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:

• start the engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingThe vehicle needs service more often when pulling atrailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information. Things that are especiallyimportant in trailer operation are automatic transmissionfluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brakesystem. It is a good idea to inspect these before andduring the trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingThe cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-28.

Changing a Tire When Trailer TowingIf the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from thevehicle before changing the tire.

4-34

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

the Vehicle .................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-13Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19Cooling System ............................................5-22Engine Coolant .............................................5-23Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27Engine Overheating .......................................5-28

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ........................................5-30

Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32Brakes ........................................................5-33Battery ........................................................5-36Jump Starting ...............................................5-38

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-43Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-46

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-46Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-46Tires ..............................................................5-48

Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-49Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-54Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-57High-Speed Operation ...................................5-59Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-60Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-61Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67Buying New Tires .........................................5-68Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-69Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-71Wheel Replacement ......................................5-71

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Chains ..................................................5-73If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-74Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-76Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-77Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-83Spare Tire ...................................................5-85

Appearance Care ............................................5-86Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-86Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-87Leather .......................................................5-88Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-88Wood Panels ...............................................5-89Speaker Covers ............................................5-89Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-89Weatherstrips ...............................................5-89Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-90Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-90Finish Care ..................................................5-90

Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-91Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ....5-92Tires ...........................................................5-93Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-93Finish Damage .............................................5-93Underbody Maintenance ................................5-93Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-93

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-94Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-94Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-94

Electrical System ............................................5-94Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-95Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-95Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-95Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-95Rear Underseat Fuse Block ...........................5-98

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are addedto the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,traction control, and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even cause malfunction or damagenot covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from theinstallation or use of non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are not covered under theterms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuineGM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-69.

5-3

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (includingsome inside the vehicle), many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and the vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts, andtools before attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrong fasteners areused, parts can later break or fall off. You couldbe hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the properservice manual. It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-16.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.

5-4

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileageand the date of any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-15.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofthe VehicleThings added to the outside of the vehicle can affect theairflow around it. This can cause wind noise and canaffect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipmentto the outside of the vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’sacceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might

notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmight notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. Ifthis occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage theengine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needsservice.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolines containing MMT. SeeAdditives on page 5-6 for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meetCalifornia specifications. See the underhood emissioncontrol label. If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, butemission control system performance might be affected.

5-5

The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-61. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determinedthat the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. In mostcases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not use TOP TIER DetergentGasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engineoil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectorsand intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additive recommended by GeneralMotors.

Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuelthat contains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

5-6

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and follow all the instructions onthe pump island. Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.



Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of the vehicle.

5-7

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge inand release and it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is releasedtoo soon, it will spring back to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. This spraycan happen if the tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-61.

5-8

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying the stationattendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage the fuel tank andemissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-61.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inthe vehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can bebadly burned and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or onany surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the insideof the fill opening before operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

5-9

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others couldbe burned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo lift the hood:

1. Pull the hood releaselever with this symbolon it. It is located on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find thesecondary hood release lever, located near thecenter of the hood. Move the release lever up andto the right to raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are onproperly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, here is what you will see:

4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar

5-12

A. Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-95.B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-38.C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-32.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Engine Coolant on page 5-23.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Startingon page 5-38.

F. Power Steering Fluid on page 5-31.G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-13.H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-13.I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”

under Brakes on page 5-33.J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick

(Out of View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid onpage 5-19.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil level at eachfuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, theoil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip ofthe dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 5-103.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range in the cross-hatched area. Push thedipstick all the way back in when through.

5-14

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM4718M

This vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic. However,not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718MStandard designation can cause engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numberson an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburstsymbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol onthe container. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for thisvehicle.Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engineoil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might notbe available. You can add substitute oil designatedSAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718Mshould not be used for an oil change.

5-15

Engine Oil Additives / Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM standards areall that is needed for good performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended andcould cause engine damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer system that indicates whento change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, theoil life system might not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained people who will perform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)being turned on, reset the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message must be reset:

1. Turn the key to the ON/RUN position withoutstarting the engine.

2. Press the INFO button on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING isdisplayed. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-68.

3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100%is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comesback on when the vehicle is started, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it inthe trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If youare driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filterat each engine oil change.

5-17

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter isrequired.

To inspect or replace the filter:

1. Remove the two screws on the top of the engine aircleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an anglewhile pulling toward you. This is necessary due to thetwo hinges located on the inboard side of the cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter and any loosedebris that may be found in the air cleaner base.

4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

To reinstall the cover:1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of

the cover.2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the

engine to engage the tabs in the hinges andalign the two screws.

3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine aircleaner/filter cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter offcan cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily getinto the engine, which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

5-18

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check the automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 6-5, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealer/retailer servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may haveto drive longer.

5-19

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, positionthe shift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

1. Locate the transmission fluid cap which is locatednext to the radiator hose and below the engine aircleaner/filter assembly on the driver side of thevehicle. The cap is marked TRANS FLUID.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

2. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assemblyto reach the transmission fluid cap, turn the capcounterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstickand wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, andthen pull it back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, pushthe dipstick back in all the way and turn thehandle clockwise.

6. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter assembly.

5-20

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on thedipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage the vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.Always use the automatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-11.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way and turn the handleclockwise.

5-21

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fans


5-22

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® cancause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the cooling system and how tocheck and add coolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 5-28.

5-23

What to Use

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system canbe dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing elseneeds to be added. This mixture:

• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),outside temperature.

• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),engine temperature.

• Protects against rust and corrosion.

• Will not damage aluminum parts.

• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, theengine could overheat and be badly damaged. Therepair cost would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are usedin the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in this manual for thecooling system. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

5-24

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level surface when checkingthe coolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recoverytank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. Ifcoolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or abovethe FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantrecovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 formore information.

How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause the engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

5-25

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the surge tankpressure cap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

1. Remove the coolantsurge tank pressurecap when the coolingsystem, including thecoolant surge tankpressure cap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap and remove it.

3. Fill the coolantsurge tank with theproper mixture tothe FULL COLD markon the side of thecoolant surge tank.

5-26

4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start theengine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the enginecooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on theside of the coolant surge tank.

5. Replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight andfully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.


5-27

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicators to warn of engineoverheating.

There is an engine temperature warning light and/orgage on the instrument panel cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-59 andEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-60.

The vehicle may also display a ENGINE OVERHEATEDIDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE message displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-73 for more information. You willalso hear a chime.

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get service help right away.See Roadside Service on page 7-7.

If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicleis parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, both fans shouldbe running. If they are not, do not continue to runthe engine and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage from running the enginewithout coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving withno coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-30 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

5-28

If Steam Is Coming From The EngineCompartment

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Turn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no signof steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehicles engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned. Stop the engine if itoverheats, and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 5-30 for information on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steamcan be seen or heard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hotwhen the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

• Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign ofsteam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature andto the highest fan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) whilestopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road, shift toP (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.

5-29

If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in theoverheat zone or an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drivethe vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in front of you. If thewarning does not come back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park thevehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while parked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.Also, see ‘‘Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode’’ next in this section.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and themessage ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE isdisplayed, an overheat protection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, you will notice a loss in power andengine performance. This operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oillife system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

5-30

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is located next tothe underhood fuse blockon the passenger side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage thevehicle and the damages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-11.

5-31

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, besure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If the vehicle will be operating in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message willbe displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other parts ofthe washer system. Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-32

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT3 brake fluid. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation and access.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down:

• The brake fluid level goes down because of normalbrake lining wear. When new linings are installed,the fluid level goes back up.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can alsocause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does notcorrect a leak. If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too much fluid when new brakelinings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on theengine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, and the vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, theSERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-73.

5-33

What to AddUse only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. This helps keepdirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulicsystem, the brakes might not work well. This couldcause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake

hydraulic system parts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, inthe brake hydraulic system can damage brakehydraulic system parts so badly that they willhave to be replaced. Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-90.

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound can come and go or be heard all thetime the vehicle is moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonthe brakes will not work well. That could lead to anaccident. When the brake wear warning sound isheard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withthe brakes.

5-34

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torque specifications in Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-103.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied, with or without thevehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When parts of the braking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and newones are installed — be sure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

5-35

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for onethat has the replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. Toaccess the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Blockon page 5-98. Access to the battery is not necessary tojump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 5-38.

{CAUTION:

A battery that is not properly vented can letsulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rearseat cushion. These fumes can damage the rearseat safety belt systems. You might not be able tosee this damage and the safety belts might notprovide the protection needed in a crash. If areplacement battery is ever needed, it must bevented in the same manner as the original battery.Always make sure that the vent hose is properlyreattached before reinstalling the seat cushion.

5-36

To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, thevent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattachedto the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery andthe vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to thefloor pan (E).

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas thatcan explode. You can be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.This helps keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over an extended period of time.

5-37

Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want touse another vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do itsafely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some orall of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to the vehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involvedin the jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

5-38

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off the radio and otheraccessories when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump startingterminal and a remote negative (−) jump startingterminal.

The remote positive (+) terminal is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the terminal.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on the location of the remotepositive (+) terminal.A second remote positive (+) terminal is located onthe rear underseat fuse block.The remote negative (−) terminal is located behindthe power steering pulley, near the engine cover.It is marked GND (−).

4.6L LD8 Engine shown,4.6L L37 Engine similar

5-39

You will not see the battery of your vehicle under thehood. It is located under the rear passenger’s seat.You will not need to access the battery for jumpstarting. The remote terminals are for that purpose.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do notneed to add water to the battery installed in yournew vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Donot get it on you. If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

5-40

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remotepositive (+) terminal location on the vehicle withthe dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle withthe good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal location of the vehicle withthe good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end of the cable touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal marked GND (−).

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-41

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal (GND)

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-42

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may benecessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, thismay also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

Notice: To make sure the headlamps are aimedproperly, read all the instructions before beginning.Failure to follow these instructions could causedamage to headlamp parts.

The vehicle should:

• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) froma light colored wall.

• Have all four tires on a level surface which is levelall the way to the wall.

• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.

• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.

• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped whileheadlamp aiming is being performed.

• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and oneperson or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.

• Have all tires properly inflated.

• Have the spare tire is in its original location in thevehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beamheadlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctlyaimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.

5-43

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

2. Find the center line running through the lens of theheadlamp.

3. Record the distance from the ground to the centerline running through the lens of the headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) tothe recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of thevehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beamcut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-up which may causedamage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlampnot being aimed. This should allow only the beam oflight from the headlamp being aimed to be seen onthe flat surface.

5-44

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. Theyare located under the hood near each headlampassembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.Each one is the top outboard screw by the “V” on thecover panel next to the aiming flap.The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mmhex wrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlampbeam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower theangle of the beam.The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned atthe bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tapeline. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows theincorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

5-45

Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by yourdealer/retailer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity discharge lightingsystem operates at a very high voltage. If you try toservice any of the system components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or aqualified technician service them.

The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HIDheadlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice thatthe beam is a slightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearor cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information on wiper blade inspection.Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. Here is how to removethe wiper blade:1. Turn the engine off.2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away from

the windshield.

3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point andpull the blade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm andfirmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.

5-46

To remove and replace the wiper blade element:

1. The wiper blade element has two notches at oneend which are engaged by the bottom claw set ofthe wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiperblade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiperblade assembly.

2. Replace the element by starting at the heel end ofthe wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the baseof the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.

3. Engage the last claw into the notched end of thewiper blade element by squeezing the wiper bladeelement at the notched area, and push the wiperblade element so the claw fits into the notch.

4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches areengaged by the last claw set and all the other clawsare properly engaged in the slots of the wiper bladeelement on both sides.

A. Correct InstallationB. Incorrect Installation

For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13.

5-47

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchflexing. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-19.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resultingaccident could cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently to maintain therecommended pressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when your tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 5-59 forinflation pressure adjustment for high speeddriving.

5-48

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger Car Tire Example

5-49

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-19.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compactspare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. SeeSpare Tire on page 5-85 and If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 5-74.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-50

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57 and Spare Tire on page 5-85.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspectratio, construction type and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Light Truck Tire Example

5-51

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used in a dualconfiguration.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used as a single.For information on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

5-52

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load index and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certified tocarry a load.

5-53

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may bemade from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-19.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.

5-54

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on lightduty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-19.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle. Theside of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on the other sidewall ofthe tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressureas shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-57 and Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-19.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

5-55

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-70.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-19.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under Loading theVehicle on page 4-19.

5-56

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists yourvehicle’s original equipment tires and shows thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-19. How you load yourvehicle affects the vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the spare tire. If your vehicle has acompact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).For additional information see Spare Tire onpage 5-85.

5-57

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or drivenno more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get apressure measurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommended pressure onthe Tire and Loading Information label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure islow, add air until you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Professional VehicleThe proper inflation of the tires on your professionalvehicle depends on the type of tires on it.• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the

cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires, the

cold inflation pressure depends on the vehiclemass and should be determined by the vehiclecoach-builder. A Tire and Loading Informationlabel provided by the final stage manufacturershould be attached to the B-pillar on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. If the final stagemanufacturer’s label is not present, thecoach-builder should be consulted. Do not usethe tire pressures indicated on the GeneralMotors label. These tire pressures are for theincomplete vehicle and are not the correct tirepressures for the completed professionalvehicle.

Operation at inflation pressures below thisrecommendation may cause your tires to becomeoverloaded.

5-58

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) orhigher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. You could havea crash and you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflation pressureadjustment for high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such that a vehiclecan be driven at high speeds, make sure the tiresare rated for high speed operation, in excellentcondition, and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 sizetires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the coldinflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressureshown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),whichever is lower. See the example following.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflation pressuremolded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, nearthe rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximumload 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflation pressure forhigh-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).

When you end this high-speed driving, return the tiresto the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-19.

5-59

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system isnot operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-61 foradditional information.

5-60

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:



Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency andcomply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThis vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver whena low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excludingthe spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires andtransmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver locatedin the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS illuminates the lowtire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrumentpanel cluster.

At the same time a message to check the pressure in aspecific tire appears on the Driver Information Center(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on at each ignition cycleuntil the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

5-61

Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by thedriver. For additional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-68 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-73.

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. This could be an earlyindicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to yourvehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-19, for an example of the Tire andLoading Information label and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tirepressure condition but it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-65 and Tires on page 5-48.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tire sealant is not coveredby your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.

TPMS Malfunction Light and MessageThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more of theTPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on for theremainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning messageis also displayed. The low tire warning light and DICwarning message come on at each ignition cycle until theproblem is corrected. Some of the conditions that cancause the malfunction light and DIC message to comeon are:

• One of the road tires has been replaced with thespare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DICmessage should go off once you re-install the roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.

• The TPMS sensor matching process was started butnot completed or not completed successfully afterrotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message andTPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMSsensor matching process is performed successfully.See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in thissection.

5-62

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. The DIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should go off when the TPMSsensors are installed and the sensor matchingprocess is performed successfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than those recommended for yourvehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service ifthe TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Anytime you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or moreof the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire usinga TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer forservice.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s airpressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do notexceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on thetire’s sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use thepointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

5-63

You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheelposition, and five minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, tomatch the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutesto match all four tire and wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’slock and unlock buttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. The horn sounds twiceto signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver side front tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,

which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,confirms that the sensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire and wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times toindicate the sensor identification code has beenmatched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process is no longer active.The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

5-64

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs ofwear or damage. See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-67 for more information.

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achievea uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thiswill ensure that your vehicle continues to performmost like it did when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67 and WheelReplacement on page 5-71 for more information.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it shouldnot be included in the tire rotation process. Use thefour-tire rotation pattern shown.

Four-Tire Rotation Pattern

5-65

A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for yourprofessional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare tireand wheel assembly that matches the originalequipment tires and wheels in size, type and brand.The correct five-tire rotation pattern is shown.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-19.

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the sensorsreset after a tire rotation is performed. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 5-103.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirt off. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-74.

Five-Tire Rotation Pattern

5-66

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditionsinfluence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if yourvehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsure aboutthe need to replace your tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for more information.

5-67

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. The original equipment tires installed on yourvehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires with thesame TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give thesame performance and vehicle safety, during normaluse, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling, traction control, and tirepressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPCSpec number will be followed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-49 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This isbecause uniform tread depth on all tires will help keepyour vehicle performing most like it did when the tireswere new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affectthe braking and handling performance of your vehicle.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could have a crash. Using tiresof different sizes, brands, or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire andwheel assembly. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire and wheel, they have the same overalldiameter as your vehicle’s full-size tires andwheels. Because they were designed anddeveloped for use on your vehicle, it is all right todrive your vehicle with the compact spare installedproperly. Compact spare tires are designed fortemporary use only. See Spare Tire on page 5-85.

5-68

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are thesame size, load range, speed rating, and constructiontype (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’soriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressurewarning that is higher or lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading Information Label. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-19, for more information about the Tireand Loading Information Label and its location on yourvehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this may affectthe way your vehicle performs, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics, stability, and resistanceto rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle maynot provide an acceptable level of performance andsafety if tires not recommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increase the chance that youwill crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-69

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature AThe following information relates to thesystem developed by the United States NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary use sparetires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

5-70

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law. It should be noted thatthe temperature grade for this tire is established fora tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned andbalanced carefully at the factory to give you the longesttire life and best overall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment might need to be checked. If you notice yourvehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tiresand wheels might need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels cansometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer/retailer ifany of these conditions exist.

5-71

Your GM dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have theright wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensorsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make you



lose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels havea unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of thewheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheelsnuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehiclehave five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-74 for more information.

5-72

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.You cannot know how it has been used or how farit has been driven. It could fail suddenly andcause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, usea new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle withoutthe proper amount of clearance can cause



damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. Ifyou do find traction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

5-73

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pullsthe vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you would usein a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment and training. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-6.

5-74

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you orother people. You and they could be badly injuredor even killed. Find a level place to change yourtire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restart whilethe vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain in thevehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,you should put blocks at the front and rear of thetire farthest away from the one being changed.That would be the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explains how to use the jackand change a tire.

5-75

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment needed is in the trunk. To accessthe equipment:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for moreinformation.

2. Press the area at thefront of the handlelocated on the coverso that the back edgeraises.

3. Grab the handle andremove the cover.

4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holdsthe wrench and jack.

5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire fromthe trunk. See Spare Tire on page 5-85 for moreinformation.

5-76

The tools to be used are the jack (A) and the wheelwrench (B).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing

a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more information.

2. For models having aluminum wheels with a centerwheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench togently pry the wheel covers off. Store the wheelcover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have theflat tire repaired or replaced. Be careful not to scratchthe aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove itwith your hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts with thewheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.

5-77

3. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen them usingthe wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.

4. Find the jacking location from the diagram aboveand use the corresponding cutouts located in theplastic molding.The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from therear edge of the front wheel well, and the rearlocation (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the frontedge of the rear wheel well.The notches may also be labeled JACK with anarrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.

5-78

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get under avehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and even makethe vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head intothe proper location before raising the vehicle.

Notice: If you position the jack under the rockermolding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you couldbreak the molding and/or cause other damage to yourvehicle. Always position the jack so that when thejack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notchlocated inboard from the rocker molding.

5. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower thejack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.

6. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly intothe channel of the jack head.

7. Put the spare tire near you.

5-79

8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.

9. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.

10. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfaces, andspare wheel.

5-80

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which itis fastened, can make wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come off and causean accident. When changing a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-74.

11. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts becausethe nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Put the wheel nuts backon with the roundedend of the nuts towardthe wheel. Tighten eachnut by hand until thewheel is held againstthe hub.

5-81

13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectlytightened can cause the wheels to become looseor come off. The wheel nuts should be tightenedwith a torque wrench to the proper torquespecification after replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the aftermarketmanufacturer when using accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-103 for original equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torquespecification. See Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-103 for the wheel nut torque specification.

5-82

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,screw the nut covers on with your fingers, thentighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’scompact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or the spare could bedamaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, storethe flat tire in your trunk.

Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartmentin the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raiseduntil the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soonas you can.

5-Wheel Nuts 8-Wheel Nuts

5-83

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. RetainerD. Jack and Wheel WrenchE. Jack ContainerF. Spare TireG. Bolt

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13.

2. Reinstall the spare tire (F), face down, making sureto line up the wheel center hole with the bolt (G)and place it on the compartment floor.

3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into thecenter of the spare tire making sure to line upthe wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on thecompartment floor.

4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container withthe retainer (C) and then the wing nut (B).

5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).

5-84

Spare Tire

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Althoughthe compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehiclewas new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflationpressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop assoon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctlyinflated. The compact spare is made to perform well atspeeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip andhave the full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace the sparewith a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do nottake the vehicle through an automatic car wash withguide rails. The compact spare can get caught on therails which can damage the tire, wheel and otherparts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.Using them can damage the vehicle and can damagethe chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compactspare.

Spare TireYour vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when new,was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air over time, socheck its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation -Tire Pressure on page 5-57 and Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-19 for information regarding proper tire inflationand loading your vehicle. For instructions on how toremove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing theFlat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-77.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you shouldstop as soon as possible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. Have the damaged or flat roadtire repaired or replaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tirewill be available in case you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire thanthe road tire originally installed on your vehicle.This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,so it is all right to drive on it.

If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match yourvehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and type,do not include the spare in the tire rotation.

5-85

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could causestains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to home furnishings may alsotransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glassand/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only asoft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholsteryand clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with acleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

5-86

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residue that streaks andattracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. thatcan damage the vehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper toweluntil no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaneror spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleanedarea gives any impression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

5-87

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used to removedust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a softcloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot liftersor spot removers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve andprotect leather may permanently change the appearanceand feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products, or those containingorganic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

TEHAMA™ LeatherThe leather surface on the seat was not designed to beaggressively cleaned using any commercial product. Usea well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove dust.Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather surface withwater. Allow the leather to dry naturally. If a soil occursthat cannot be completely removed, allow it to becomepart of the natural markings of the leather. The leather inthe vehicle was designed to have a natural appearanceand develop a more vintage appearance with use.

Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to cleanleather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers onleather. It is very important to not use any commercialleather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather. Not only are those products notnecessary, they will permanently and adversely changethe appearance and feel of the leather. Never usesilicone or wax-based products, or those containingorganic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior. Never useshoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used to removedust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a cleansoft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can beused to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercialcleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve andprotect soft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of the interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents to cleanthe vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner.

5-88

Some commercial products may increase gloss onthe instrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (usemild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediatelywith a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severelyweaken them. In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-89

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.Check the cleaning product label. If it states thatit should not be used on plastic parts, do not use iton the vehicle or damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) canresult in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Followinstructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-90.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from the paintfinish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish on the vehicle.

5-90

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over a periodof years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam orcaustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or papertowel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly whencleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and abuildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-91

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimThe vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-platedwheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim maybe damaged if the vehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasivepolishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Use only approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because they could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chromepolish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes, could damage the aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Never drivea vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

5-92

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may damage the paint finishand/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, alwayswipe off any overspray from all painted surfaceson the vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will providethe corrosion protection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finishshould be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrodequickly and may develop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened before being flushed. Yourdealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, andsmall, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-93

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on aplate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side. It can be seen through the windshield fromoutside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and the certificatesof title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. Thiscode helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103 forthe vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful ifparts need to be ordered. The label has the followinginformation:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicleunless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Someelectrical equipment can damage the vehicle andthe damage would not be covered by the vehicle’swarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

5-94

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-68.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses. Anelectrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off,or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have theheadlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, thereis an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of firescaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical sizeand rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that youcan get along without — like the radio or cigarettelighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located on the passengerside of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse coverand secondary service cover to access the fuse block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson the vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

5-95

Fuses Usage

1 Engine Control Module (ECM),Crank

2 Fuel Injectors Odd

Fuses Usage3 Fuel Injectors Even4 Air Conditioning Clutch5 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid

5-96

Fuses Usage6 Oxygen Sensor7 Emission Device8 Transmission, Ignition 1

9 Engine Control Module (ECM),Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

10 Climate Control System, InstrumentPanel Cluster Ignition 1

11 Airbag System12 Horn13 Windshield Wiper14 Fog Lamps15 Right High-Beam Headlamp16 Left High-Beam Headlamp17 Left Low-Beam Headlamp18 Right Low-Beam Headlamp19 Windshield Washer Pump Motor20 Left Front Cornering Lamp21 Right Front Cornering Lamp22 Air Pump (J-Case)

Fuses Usage

23 Antilock Brake System (ABS)(J-Case)

24 Starter (J-Case)

25 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Motor(J-Case)

26 Cooling Fan 2 (J-Case)27 Cooling Fan 1 (J-Case)28 Windshield Washer Heater (J-Case)

Relays Usage29 Powertrain30 Starter31 Cooling Fan 232 Cooling Fan 333 Cooling Fan 134 Air Conditioning Clutch35 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid36 Ignition37 Air Pump

5-97

Rear Underseat Fuse BlockThe rear fuse block is located under the rear seat onthe driver side. The rear seat cushion must be removedto access the rear fuse block.

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with themetal on the seat cushion, you could cause a shortthat could damage the battery and or wires. Avoidcontact between the rear seat and the fusecenter whenever you remove or reinstall the rearseat. Do not remove covers from any of the coveredparts, and do not store anything under the seats.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release thefront hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of thevehicle.

To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on thecover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, nearthe battery cable.

5-98

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routed throughthe seat cushion or is twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. If the safety belt has



not been routed through the seat cushion at all, itwill not be there to work for the next passenger.The person sitting in that position could be badlyinjured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, alwayscheck to be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and are not twisted.

1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,then route the safety belts through the proper slotsin the seat cushion. Do not let the safety beltsget twisted.

2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under theseatback so the rear-locating guides hook intothe wire loops on the back frame.

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward andthen press down on the seat cushion until thespring locks on both ends engage.

4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properlyrouted and that no portion of any safety belt istrapped under the seat. Also make sure the seatcushion is secured.

5-99

Fuses Usage1 Fuel Pump2 Left Park Lamp3 Run 3 - Rear Blower

Fuses Usage4 Right Park Lamp

5 Engine Control Module (ECM)/Transmission Control Module (TCM)

5-100

Fuses Usage6 Memory Module7 Right Park Lamp (optional)8 Steering Wheel Illumination9 Front Heated/Cooled Seat Module

10 Run 2 - Heated/Cooled Seats,Heated Washer Fluid

11 Rear Heated Seat Module12 RPA Module13 PASS-Key® III System14 Unlock/Lock Module15 Magnetic Ride Control16 Not Used17 Sunroof18 Body Control Module (BCM) Dim19 Body Control Module (BCM)20 Run 1-Heated Steering Wheel21 Ignition Switch22 Driver Door Module23 Rear Lumbar24 Electronic Leveling Control Module

Fuses Usage

25 Body Control Module (Left TurnSignal)

26 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

27 Navigation (Optional)28 Retained Accessory Power 1 (RAP)29 Passenger Door Module30 Sensing and Diagnostic Module31 Accessory Power Outlets

32 Body Control Module (BCM)(Inadvertent)

33 Retained Accessory Power 2 (RAP)34 Canister Vent Solenoid35 Body Control Module (Courtesy)

36 Body Control Module (Right TurnSignal)

37 Trunk Release38 Amplifier, Radio39 Body Control Module (CHMSL)40 Body Control Module41 Stoplamp (optional)

5-101

Fuses Usage42 OnStar® Module43 Body Modules44 Radio45 Door Unlatch (optional)46 Rear Defogger (J-Case)

47 Electronic Leveling ControlCompressor (J-Case)

48 Blower (J-Case) (optional)49 Blower (J-Case) (optional)

Resistor Usage50 Terminating Resistor

Relays Usage51 Front Blower (optional)52 Rear Defogger

53 Electronic Leveling ControlCompressor

58 Park Lamps

Relays Usage59 Fuel Pump60 License Plate Lamp (optional)61 Right Park Lamp (optional)62 Unlock63 Lock64 Run65 Not Used66 Door Unlatch (optional)67 Trunk Release68 Stoplamp (optional)69 Overhead Lamps (optional)70 Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

CircuitBreakers

Usage

54 Right Front Seat55 Left Front Power Seat56 Power Windows57 Power Tilt Steering Wheel

5-102

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System 12.6 qt 12.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter 7.5 qt 7.1 L

Fuel Tank 18.5 gal 70.0 L

Transmission 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.6L DOHC V8 Engine Y Automatic 0.050 in (1.27 mm)

4.6L DOHC V8 Engine 9 Automatic 0.050 in (1.27 mm)

5-103

✍ NOTES

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-5Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warrantyand Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepthe vehicle in good working condition, but also helpsthe environment. All recommended maintenanceis important. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase thelevel of emissions from the vehicle. To help protectthe environment, and to keep the vehicle in goodcondition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you will driveit. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather. You might use thevehicle in making deliveries. Or you might driveit to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits on the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-19.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-5 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can bedangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can beseriously injured. Do your own maintenance workonly if you have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. If you haveany doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailerdo these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine parts.

To purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells whatshould be checked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keep the vehicle in goodcondition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-11 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceTo maintain the ride, handling, and performance ofthe vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotationservice be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires forinflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-48.Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-65 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Oncea Month on page 6-9.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagedisplays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), serviceis required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle servicedas soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter must be changed atleast once a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work using genuineparts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last service. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-16 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, the following services, checks, and inspectionsare required:❑ Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on

page 5-13. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.

❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.See footnote (k).

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replacefilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.See footnote (m).

❑ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-65 and“Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 6-9.

❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid

levels and add fluid as needed.❑ Perform any needed additional services.

See “Additional Required Services” in this section.❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.

See footnote (b).❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).❑ Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).❑ Check transmission fluid level and add fluid

as needed.

6-4

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-17.

• • •

Replace passenger compartmentair filter. See footnote (g). • • • • • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

6-5

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Except Professional Vehicle: Enginecooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (j).

•

Professional Vehicle Only: Enginecooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (j).

• •

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parkingbrake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are wornor damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacementon page 5-46 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-91 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.

If you see anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking theRestraint Systems on page 1-70.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the hood, rearcompartment, glove box door, and console door.More frequent lubrication may be required when exposedto a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine

service.− Uses such as high performance operation.

6-7

(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

(m) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emission control performance.Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks andservices.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to thevehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-23.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

6-8

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileage highwaydrivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-65.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-32.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailerfor service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF onlywhen the shift lever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should come out only inLOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle couldbegin to move. You or others could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

6-10

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and the transmissionin N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicleis held by the parking brake only.

• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take careto clean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certifiedfor Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. However, not all syntheticAPI oils with the starburst symbolwill meet this GM standard.Look for and use only oil that meetsGM Standard GM4718M. For theproper viscosity, see Engine Oilon page 5-13.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23.

6-11


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

6-12

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter 89017342 PF61

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 25906375 CF118C

Spark Plugs 12571535 41–987

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 21.7 in (55.0 cm) 15931977 —

Passenger Side – 21.7 in (55.0 cm) 15931976 —

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.6L V8 Engines

6-14

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


6-16



6-17



6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-5Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7Roadside Service ...........................................7-7Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..........................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-16Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18OnStar® ......................................................7-19Navigation System ........................................7-19Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of the vehiclewill be resolved by the dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, in theUnited States, call the Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenter, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,call the Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of the instrumentpanel and visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step One first.

7-2

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motorsand your dealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you canfile with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AutoLine Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileageand other factors. General Motors reserves the right tochange eligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

7-3

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after the following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in a no-chargemediation/Arbitration program. General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involving factory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, and mayinclude an informal hearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), calltoll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write tothe Mediation/Arbitration Program at the followingaddress:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1–163–0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

7-4

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/cadillacInformation and services customized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warranty information,and more

• Online service and maintenance records

• Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specific vehicle

• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earningssummaries

Other Helpful Links:Cadillac — www.cadillac.com

Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com

Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is a password-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can save information onGM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as addressand phone number for each of your preferred GMdealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts andservice estimates, check trade-in values, orschedule a service appointment by adding thevehicles you own to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use toolsand forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section withinwww.gm.ca.

7-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-6

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceIn the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance, have the followinginformation ready:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

7-7

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. InCanada, a person driving the vehicle without permissionfrom the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to limit services or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel

for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock thevehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must present identificationbefore this service is given.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Road orHighway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash andcannot be driven. Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change aflat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition and properly inflated.It is your responsibility for the repair or replacementof the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jumpstart a dead battery.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of NorthAmerica are provided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or the most scenic route.Additional travel information is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,incidental expenses may be reimbursed duringthe 5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrainwarranty period. Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

7-8

Cadillac Technician Roadside Service(U.S. only)Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than anauto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillacowner in the United States with the advantage ofcontacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, aCadillac trained dealer technician who can provideon-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to your location within a30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have yourcar towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Eachtechnician travels with a specially equipped servicevehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts andtools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehicles driven on anon-public road or highway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately

$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders are required. Onceauthorization has been received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help you make arrangementsand explain how to receive payment.

• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot beprovided right away, the Roadside Assistanceadvisor may give you permission to get localemergency road service. You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by the warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

7-9

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle forservice, you are urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extended powertrain, andhybrid specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruption ofyour daily schedule. This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)from the dealership.

7-10

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttleservice, the expense must be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts. See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement offuel or other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warrantyrepair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, pleasesee your dealer for the maximum number of daysallowed and the allowance per rental day. Rentalreimbursement must be supported by original receipts.

This requires that you sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every dealer. Please contact your dealerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

7-11

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairswill diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made withthe same materials and construction methods asthe parts with which your vehicle was originally built.Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,durability and safety are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your

vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts is notknown. Such parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These aremade by companies other than GM and may not havebeen tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure relatedto such parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained techniciansand state of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

7-12

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies provide reduced protection toyour GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend thatyou assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM originalequipment collision parts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your current insurance carrier,consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.Read your lease carefully, as you may be chargedat the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are allright. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one elsein your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you in danger or you areinstructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frameof mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-7 formore information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card from thetow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep these itemsin your vehicle.

7-13

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you through theinformation they will need. If they ask for a policereport, phone or go to the police departmentheadquarters the next day and you can get a copyof the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a reportmay not be necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retaileror a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortablewith their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Rememberif your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

7-14

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer/retailer,or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

7-15

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in asituation like this, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

7-16

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:


Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example, yourvehicle uses computer modules to monitor and controlengine and transmission performance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbagsin a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help your dealer/retailer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. These modules may alsoretain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radiopre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

7-17

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltswere buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) is recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying data routinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipmentis required, and access to the vehicle or the EDRis needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,other parties, such as law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required by law.Data that GM collects or receives may also be used forGM research needs or may be made available to othersfor research purposes, where a need is shown and thedata is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

7-18

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions for information on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® System on page 2-51 inthis manual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-19

✍ NOTES

7-20

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Accessory Power ............................................ 2-26Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-38Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-19Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................... 1-69Additional Required Services,

Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 3-48Airbag

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-54Airbag System ................................................ 1-55

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-69

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-62Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-64Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-68What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-61What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-62When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-60Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-57

AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-55

Analog Clock .................................................. 3-39Antenna

Backglass ................................................. 3-129Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ......................................... 3-129Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4

Warning Light ............................................. 3-57Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-89Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-93Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-90Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87Finish Care ................................................. 5-90Finish Damage ............................................ 5-93Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-88Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-86Leather ...................................................... 5-88Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-93Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-89Tires .......................................................... 5-93Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-90Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-89Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-91Wood Panels .............................................. 5-89

Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-39

1

Audio System ................................................. 3-95Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-127Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................ 3-116Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-96XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-129

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-99Audio Systems

Radio Reception ........................................ 3-128Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-127

Automatic TransmissionFluid .......................................................... 5-19Operation ................................................... 2-29

BBackglass Antenna ........................................ 3-129Battery .......................................................... 5-36

Electric Power Management .......................... 3-36Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-34Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-37Load Management ....................................... 3-36Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-37

Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-14Bluetooth® .................................................... 3-116Brake

Emergencies ................................................ 4-5Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-33

Brakes .......................................................... 5-33Antilock ....................................................... 4-4Parking ...................................................... 2-32System Warning Light .................................. 3-56

Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-24Bulb Replacement

Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-34Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-43Headlamps ................................................. 5-46High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-46

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-68

CCalibration ............................................. 1-11, 2-38California

Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4California Fuel .................................................. 5-5California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-36Trunk ......................................................... 2-13Winter Driving ............................................. 4-16

2

Care ofSafety Belts ................................................ 5-89

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 3-110Center Console Storage ................................... 2-62Center Flex Storage Unit ................................. 2-63Center Seat ................................................... 1-10Central Door Unlock System ............................. 2-11Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-73Charging System Light .................................... 3-56Check

Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-61Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93Child Restraints

Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-36Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-43Older Children ............................................. 1-33Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-49Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ........................ 1-51Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-52Systems ..................................................... 1-39Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-42

Circuit Breakers .............................................. 5-95

CleaningAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-90Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87Finish Care ................................................. 5-90Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-88Interior ....................................................... 5-86Leather ...................................................... 5-88Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-89Tires .......................................................... 5-93Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-90Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-89Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-91Wood Panels .............................................. 5-89

Climate Control SystemOutlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-46

Climate Control SystemsDual .......................................................... 3-40Rear .......................................................... 3-46

Clock ............................................................ 3-39Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-96Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12Compass ............................................... 1-11, 2-38Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-21

3

Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3Convenience Net ............................................ 2-63Coolant

Engine ....................................................... 5-23Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-60Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-59Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27

Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-5Cooling System .............................................. 5-22Cornering Lamps ............................................ 3-34Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-35Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7-10Cruise Control ................................................ 3-16Cruise Control, Active ...................................... 3-19Cruise Control, Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

System ........................................................ 3-9Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-66Cupholders .................................................... 2-62Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6

Offices ......................................................... 7-6Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6

Customer InformationService Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2

DDamage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-12Data Recorders

Event ......................................................... 7-18Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-33Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Disc, MP3 .................................................... 3-110Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Central Door Unlocking System ..................... 2-11Locks ........................................................ 2-10Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-67DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-68DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-86DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-73

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-12Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-14Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunk .......................................................... 4-3

4

Driving (cont.)Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-14Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-15In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-12Loss of Control ........................................... 4-10Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-10Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-19Winter ........................................................ 4-16

Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-40

EEDR ............................................................. 7-17Electrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-94Electrical System

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-95Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-95Rear Underseat Fuse Block .......................... 5-98Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-95Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-95

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-22

Electronic Immobilizer OperationPASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-23

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-17Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-61Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12Coolant ...................................................... 5-23Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-28Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-60Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-59Cooling System ........................................... 5-22Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36Oil ............................................................. 5-13Oil Life System ........................................... 5-16Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-30Overheating ................................................ 5-28Starting ...................................................... 2-26

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-35eporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ............................ 7-15Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-32Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-29Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-34

5

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17Finish Damage ............................................... 5-93Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flash-to-Pass ................................................. 3-13Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-74Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-83Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-63Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19Power Steering ........................................... 5-31Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32

Fog LampFog ........................................................... 3-34

Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-65Footwell Lamps .............................................. 3-36Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System .................. 3-9Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-62Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-5Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9

Fuel (cont.)Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-66Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95Rear Underseat Fuse Block .......................... 5-98Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-95Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-95

GGage

Speedometer .............................................. 3-52Tachometer ................................................. 3-52

GagesEngine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-60Fuel .......................................................... 3-66

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-55Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-62GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7

6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-2Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-43Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-95Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-46Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-33Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-29Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-13High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-46High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9On Reminder .............................................. 3-33Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-32

HeatedSteering Wheel ............................................. 3-7

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5Heater

Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-28Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-66High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-59Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-14

Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-15Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-25Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-37Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-36Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-57Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-34Cluster ....................................................... 3-51Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Introduction ...................................................... 6-2

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-38

7

KKeyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-5Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-49Lamp

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-61Lamps

Cornering ................................................... 3-34Courtesy .................................................... 3-35Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-33Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-34Footwell ..................................................... 3-36Reading ..................................................... 3-35

Lane Departure Warning .................................. 2-49Lane Departure Warning Light .......................... 3-59Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-31Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-26LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-43Lighting

Entry ......................................................... 3-35Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-35

LightsAirbag Readiness ........................................ 3-54Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-57Brake System Warning ................................. 3-56Charging System ......................................... 3-56Cruise Control ............................................. 3-66Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-59Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-29Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-13Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-65Highbeam On ............................................. 3-66High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9Lane Departure Warning ............................... 3-59Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-65Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-64On Reminder .............................................. 3-33Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-55Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-53Security ..................................................... 3-65StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-58Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-60Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-58

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-19Lockout Switch, Valet ...................................... 2-20

8

LocksCentral Door Unlocking System ..................... 2-11Door .......................................................... 2-10Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door ................................................ 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-10Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-43Lumbar

Massaging Controls ....................................... 1-4Power Controls ............................................. 1-4

Lumbar Controls, Rear Power ........................... 1-11

MMagnetic Ride Control ....................................... 4-8Maintenance

Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-5At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-61Massaging Lumbar Controls ............................... 1-4Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls .... 1-6Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-73Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-38Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature ............................................ 1-11Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-40Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-41Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-41Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-40Park Tilt ..................................................... 2-41

MP3 ............................................................ 3-110

9

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................... 3-116Net

Convenience ............................................... 2-63New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-24

OObject Detection, Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ... 2-45Odometer ...................................................... 3-52Off-Road

Recovery .................................................... 4-10Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-13Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-16Pressure Light ............................................. 3-64

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-33Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-51Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-55Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-46Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-38

OutsideAutomatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-40Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-41Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-41Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-40

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .... 5-30Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-93Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-35Park

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34

Park Aid ........................................................ 2-42Park Tilt Mirrors .............................................. 2-41Parking

Assist ........................................................ 2-42Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35

Parking Brake ................................................ 2-32Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-55Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-48Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-64Passing ......................................................... 4-10PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-22

10

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic ImmobilizerOperation ................................................... 2-23

Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4Performance Shifting ....................................... 2-32Phone

Bluetooth® ................................................ 3-116Power

Door Locks ................................................. 2-11Electrical System ......................................... 5-95Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4Rear Lumbar Controls .................................. 1-11Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-8Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-26Seat ............................................................ 1-3Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-7Windows .................................................... 2-16

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-31Privacy .......................................................... 7-17

Navigation System ....................................... 7-19OnStar ....................................................... 7-19Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-19Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-99Radios

Navigation/Radio System,see Navigation Manual ............................ 3-116

Reception ................................................. 3-128Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-96Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-127

Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-14Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-35Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-46Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12Rear Heated Seats ......................................... 1-10Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-63Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-38Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature ............................................... 1-11Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-26Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4

11

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-5Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-77Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-76Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-15General Motors ........................................... 7-16

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government .................................. 7-15

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-70Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-71Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-26Roadside Service ............................................. 7-7Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-19Roof

Sunroof ...................................................... 2-64Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-37

SSafety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-53Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-89Extender .................................................... 1-32How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-31Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-26Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-31

Safety DefectsReporting to General Motors ......................... 7-16Reporting to the United States Government ..... 7-15

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-5Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10

12

SeatsCenter Seat ................................................ 1-10Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-5Heated Seats - Rear .................................... 1-10Massaging Lumbar ........................................ 1-4Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 1-6Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4Power Lumbar, Rear .................................... 1-11Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-8Power Seats ................................................. 1-3

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ............................ 1-51Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-52

Security Light ................................................. 3-65Service ........................................................... 5-3

Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-61Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10

Service Parts Identification Label ....................... 5-94Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-68

Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-96Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-93Shifting

Out of Park ................................................ 2-34Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-33Side Blind Zone Alert ...................................... 2-45Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-85

Installing .................................................... 5-77Removing ................................................... 5-76Storing ....................................................... 5-83

Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-103Speedometer .................................................. 3-52StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ............................... 3-58StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-26Steering .......................................................... 4-8Steering Wheel

Heated ........................................................ 3-7Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-127Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ....................... 1-6Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 3-7Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6

13

Storage AreasCenter Console ........................................... 2-62Center Flex Storage Unit .............................. 2-63Convenience Net ......................................... 2-63Cupholders ................................................. 2-62Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-62Glove Box .................................................. 2-62Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-63

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-18Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-19Sunroof ......................................................... 2-64

TTachometer .................................................... 3-52Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3-127Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-20

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-21PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-22PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer

Operation ................................................ 2-23Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time, Setting .................................................. 3-96Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-60

Tires ............................................................. 5-48Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ................................................. 5-92Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68Chains ....................................................... 5-73Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74Cleaning .................................................... 5-93Different Size .............................................. 5-69High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-59If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-74Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-57Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-77Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-61Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-60Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-77Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-76Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-49Spare Tire .................................................. 5-85Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-83Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-54Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-71Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-71When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-26Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-26

14

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-6Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-58Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 4-8StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-29Transportation, Courtesy .................................. 7-10Trunk ............................................................ 2-13Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8

UUltrasonic Front and Rear Parking

Assist (UFRPA) ........................................... 2-42Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-70Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-55

Operation ................................................... 2-55

VValet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-20Vehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Loading ...................................................... 4-19Running While Parked .................................. 2-37Symbols ......................................................... iii

Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-86Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17Vehicle Data Recording, Radio

Frequency (RFID) ........................................ 7-19Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-94Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94

Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-46Visors ........................................................... 2-19

15

WWarning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-50Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-73Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-71Different Size .............................................. 5-69Replacement ............................................... 5-71

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-67Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-42Windows ....................................................... 2-15

Power ........................................................ 2-16Windshield

Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-14Washer ...................................................... 3-15Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-32

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-46Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-91Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-95Wipers ....................................................... 3-13

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-16Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-32

XXM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-115XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-129

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

16

2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2010. 1. 16. · 2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M....

Documents

Transcript of 2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M - Vaden GMPP · 2010. 1. 16. · 2009 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M....